Meco Group – A Step Ahead
User Manual for OLEN ELECTRIC models including: OD9L General Vector Control Inverter, OD9L, General Vector Control Inverter, Vector Control Inverter, Control Inverter, Inverter
SZBIDOR Variable Frequency Drive: AC 220V/0.75KW 1HP 4A CNC VFD Single Phase to 3 Phase Converter for Spindle Motor Speed Control(Single Phase Input, 3 Phase Output) Black : Tools & Home Improvement
File Info : application/pdf, 225 Pages, 4.92MB
DocumentDocumentOD9L General Vector Control Inverter User Manual
Inverter | Integration and Special Machine | Brake Unit | Servo Drive| PLC
OLEN ELECTRIC
OD9L General Vector Control Inverter User Manual
STATEMENT:
All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and plagiarism are prohibited
The manufacturer's data of continuous product upgrade are subject to change without prior notice
Data No9L202201
OLEN ELECTRIC
Single phase200V power supply (3S) 0.45.5KW Three phase 220V power supply (3T) 0.490KW Three phase 380V power supply (4T) 0.75630KW
Note: in order to use this product safely, please be sure to read the user manual.
OD9L User Manual
Contents
CONTENTS
Preface.................................................................................................................................... 3
Chapter1 Safety and Precautions ........................................................................................ 6
1.1 Safety Precautions......................................................................................................... 6 1.2 Attention Items.............................................................................................................. 8
Chapter 2 Product Information ......................................................................................... 11
2.1 Naming Rules.............................................................................................................. 11 2.2 Nameplate ................................................................................................................... 11 2.3 OD9L Inverter Series .................................................................................................. 12 2.4 Technical Specification ............................................................................................... 12 2.5 Physical Appearance and Dimensions of Mounting Hole ........................................... 17 2.6 Optional Parts.............................................................................................................. 24 2.7 Routine Repair and Maintenance of Inverter .............................................................. 25 2.8 Warranty of Inverter .................................................................................................... 26 2.9 Guide to Select Brake Components ............................................................................ 26
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation............................................................ 31
3.1 Mechanical Installation ............................................................................................... 31 3.2Electrical Installation ................................................................................................... 34
Chapter 4 Operation and Display ...................................................................................... 47
4.1 Operation and Display Interface Introduction............................................................. 47 4.2 Organization Way of the Inverter Function Code........................................................ 49 4.3 Instruction of Function Code Viewing and Modification Methods............................. 50 4.4 Function Code Menu Mode and Switch Description .................................................. 51 4.5 Preparation before Running ........................................................................................ 53 4.6 Start-stop Control of the Inverter ................................................................................ 56 4.7 Running Frequency Control of the Inverter ................................................................ 61 4.8 Motor Characteristic Parameter Setting and Automotive Tuning ............................... 67 4.9 Usage of Inverter DI Ports .......................................................................................... 69 4.10 Usage of Inverter DO Ports....................................................................................... 70 4.11 AI Input Signal Character and Pretreatment.............................................................. 70 4.12 Usage of Inverter AO port......................................................................................... 71 4.13 Usage of Inverter Serial Communication .................................................................. 72 4.14 Password Setting ....................................................................................................... 72
Chapter 5 Parameter Description ...................................................................................... 73
5.1 Group F0 Basic Function ............................................................................................ 73 5.2 Group A2 Start-stop Control Function Group ............................................................. 82 5.3 Group A3 V/F Control Parameter ............................................................................... 85 5.4 Group A4 Vector Control Parameter ........................................................................... 88 5.5 GroupA1 Motor Parameter ......................................................................................... 81 5.6 Group A5 Input Terminal ............................................................................................ 91 5.7 Group A6 Output Terminal ....................................................................................... 101
1
Contents
OD9L User Manual
5.8 Group A7 Auxiliary Function and Panel Display...................................................... 105 5.9 Group A8 Communication Parameter ....................................................................... 114 5.10 Group A9 Fault and Protection ............................................................................... 115 5.11 Group AA PID Function.......................................................................................... 121 5.12 Group Ab Swing Frequency and Fixed Length Count ............................................ 126 5.13 Group AC Multi-segment Command and Simple PLC Function............................ 128 5.14 Group Ad Torque Control Parameter ...................................................................... 132 5.15 Group AE AI Multi-point Curve Setting ................................................................. 134 5.16 Group AF Default Parameter .................................................................................. 135 5.17 Group C0 Second Motor Parameter Setting............................................................ 135 5.18 Group C1 Second Motor Parameter ........................................................................ 136 5.19 Group C2 Second Motor VF Curve Setting ............................................................ 137 5.20 Group C3 Second Motor Vector Control Parameter................................................ 137 5.21 Group E0 System Parameter ................................................................................... 138 5.22 Group E1 User Function Code Customization........................................................ 138 5.23 Group E2 Optimizing Control Parameter................................................................ 139 5.24 Group E3 AIAO Correction Parameter ................................................................... 141 5.25 Group E4 Master-slave Control Parameter ............................................................. 141 5.26 Group E5 Mechanical Braking Function Parameter ............................................... 143 5.27 Group E6 Wake-up Function Parameter.................................................................. 145 5.28 Group U0 Fault Record Parameter.......................................................................... 147 5.29 Group U1 State Monitor Parameter ........................................................................ 147
Chapter6 EMC(Electromagnetic Compatibility......................................................... 150
6.1 Definition .................................................................................................................. 150 6.2 Standard Description................................................................................................. 150 6.3 EMC Guide ............................................................................................................... 150
Chapter 7 Trouble Shooting ............................................................................................. 153
7.1 Fault Warnings and Solutions ................................................................................... 153 7.2 Common Faults and Treating Methods ..................................................................... 158
Appendix A OD9L Series Modbus Communication Protocol........................................ 160
Appendix B Function Parameter Table ........................................................................... 170
Appendix C Version Change Record ............................................................................... 224
2
OD9L User Manual
Preface
Preface
Thank you for purchasing Olen OD9L series of Control Inverter. Olen OD9L series inverter is a technology upgraded product launched through market research.The series are excellent in performance, reliability and stability, easy to operate. It's easy to deal with your difficulties in the industry application process.It will bring you better user experience. We have introduced the function characteristics and usage of OD9L series of inverter in this instruction manual, including type choosing, parameter setting, operation debugging and maintenance inspection etc, please read the manual carefully before the usage. The device supplier will enclose this manual with the device when sending it to the user for their reference.
Cautions In order to display the details of the product, some products which illustrated in the diagrams of the manual are without outer cover or safety shield. Please do make the machine completed with cover or shield in the actual operation and run it according to the details of the manual.
The diagrams in the manual are just for the purpose to explanation, it may be different from the product you purchased.
We are devoted to continuous improvement of the products, so followed with the function upgrading. You will not be specially informed if the reference data is updated.
Any problems please contact our regional agents or call our customer service directly.
Unpacking inspection:
Please confirm below items carefully when unpacking the box: 1If the nameplate information and the rated value are right as your order request. The product
certification, user manual and warranty card are enclosed with the machine packed in the box. 2If the product is damaged during the transportation. Please contact our company or the
supplier immediately if there is any missing parts or damage. First-time use:
For the operator without using experience should read this manual carefully .For any doubt about certain functions and performances, please consult the technical support representatives of our company for help. It's beneficial to use the product in proper way.
3
Preface
OD9L User Manual
OD9L series of inverters meet the international standards in below, and the products have passed the CE standards.
IEC/EN 61800-5-1: 2007 Safety Regulation requirement of speed adjustable Electric Drive System
IEC/EN61800-3: Speed adjustable Electric Drive System; Part three: EMC Standard and the Specific Testing Method of the Products. (According to 7.3.2 and 7.3.6, under the circumstance of right installation and usage, meet the standard of IEC/EN 61800-3)
Don't install capacitors or surge suppressors on the output side of the inverter. This will lead the breakdown of the inverter or the damage of the capacitor and surge suppressor. The harmonic included in the input/output circuit (main circuit) may interfere with the communication devices of the inverter accessories. So anti-interference filter need to be installed to decrease the interference to the minimum. You can refer to the peripherals choose part to get more details of the peripheral devices.
4
OD9L User Manual
Connecting to the peripherals:
Please use the right power supply within allowed specification.
Pay attention to use short- circuiter for the big impact current when start the power.
Don't use magnetic contactors to start or stop the inverter, or it will shorten the service life of the inverter.
Suppress the high harmonic to improve the power factor.
Three-phase AC power source Non-fuse breaker (MCCB) or residual-current circuit Electromagnetic contactor
AC electric reactor Input side noise filter
Brake resistor (selective)
Reduce the electromagnetic interference of the input side.
The motor and the inverter must be grounded well to avoid electric shock
Safety GND
OD9L series of frequency converter
Output side noise filter
Motor
Reduce the electromagnetic interference of the output side.
Safety GND
Preface
Fig.1 illustration of connecting to the peripheral machines
5
Safety and Precautions
OD9L User Manual
Chapter1 Safety and Precautions
Safety definition: In this manual, safety precautions are divided into two types below:
! Danger
Danger arising due to improper operations may cause severe hurt or even death.
! Caution
Danger arising due to improper operations may cause moderate hurt or light hurt or equipment damage.
Please read the manual carefully before install, debug or maintain the system; following the safety rules that indicated in the detail. If any injury caused by rule-breaking operations, our company has no responsibility for it.
1.1 Safety Precautions
Status
Before installing
Safety class ! Danger
! Caution
Items
Do not install it if the control system is moistened, parts missing or components damaged. Do not install if the real objects are different from the packing list.
It should be handled with care during moving, otherwise there is risk of damage the device. Don't use the damaged drive or inverter with missing parts or there is danger of hurt. Don't use your hand to touch the components of the control system or there is risk of static damage.
! Danger
Install the inverter on incombustible surface like metal; stay away from combustible materials. Otherwise it may cause fire. Don't turn the screws without purpose, especially the bolts with red mark.
During installing
! Caution
Do not drop the lead wire stub or screw in the inverter. Otherwise it may damage the inverter. Install the inverter in the environment with less vibration and no direct sunlight. When more than two inverters are to be installed in one cabinet, pay attention to the installation location to ensure the heat dissipation effect.
6
OD9L User Manual
Safety and Precautions
During wiring
Before power
-on
! Danger ! Caution ! Caution ! Danger
The device must be installed by professional electric operator, or it will have unexpected danger. There must be breaker between the inverter and the power source, or it may have fire risk. Please make sure the power supply is off before wiring, or it has the risk of electric shock. Please earth the inverter in normative way, or it has the risk of electric shock.
Don't connect the input power supply to the output terminals (U,V,W) of the inverter. Pay attention to the marks of the wiring terminals so as to avoid the wire misconnect. Or it will cause damage to the inverter. The brake resistance cannot be directly connected between the DC bus (+),(-) terminals. Otherwise it may cause fire! Please refer to the manual to choose right wire diameter, or it may have accident.
Please confirm whether the power voltage class is consistent with the rated voltage of the inverter; whether the wiring position of the input terminals (R, S, T) and the output terminals (U, V, W) are correct; Check carefully whether the external circuit is short circuited and whether the connecting line is firm. Otherwise it may damage the inverter. There is no need to do withstand voltage test on any part of the inverter, because it has been tested before the delivery, otherwise it may cause accident.
It must have the cover plate ready on the machine before connect to the power, or it will cause electric shock. All the wiring of the peripheral device must follow the instruction of the manual which has provided the circuit illustration of the wiring way. Otherwise it may cause accident.
During power
-on
! Danger
Don't open the cover plate after connection to the power resource. Or it has danger of electric shock. Don't touch any terminals regardless of input or output side, or it has danger of electric shock.
! Caution
If you need to record the running parameter, pay attention that the running motor may have the risk to hurt people. Or it may cause accident.
7
Safety and Precautions
OD9L User Manual
During the operation
! Danger
Detection of signals during the operation shall only be conducted by qualified technician. Otherwise, personal injury or equipment damage may be caused. Do not touch the fan or discharge resistor to sense the temperature, or you may get burnt.
! Caution
During the operation of the inverter, keep items from falling into the equipment, or it may damage the equipment. Do not start and shut down the inverter by connecting and disconnecting the contactor, or it may damage the equipment.
Maintenanc e
! Danger
The inverter shall be repaired and maintained only by the qualified person who has been trained professionally, or it may cause personal injury or equipment damage. Do not repair and maintain the equipment with power-on, or there will be danger of electric shock. Only more than 10 minutes after you shut down the power supply on the input side can you start to repair or maintain the inverter, otherwise, the residual charge on the capacitor may cause personal injury.
1.2 Attention Items
1.2.1 Motor Insulation Inspection
When the motor is used for the first time, or when the motor is reused after being kept, or when periodical inspection is performed, it shall conduct motor insulation inspection so as to avoid damaging the inverter because of the insulation failure of the motor windings. The motor wires must be disconnected from the inverter during the insulation inspection. It is recommended to use the 500V mega meter, and the insulating resistance measured shall be at least 5M.
1.2.2 Thermal Protection of the Motor
If the ratings of the motor does not match those of the inverter, especially when the rated power of the inverter is higher than the rated power of the motor, the relevant motor protection parameters in the in the inverter shall be adjusted, or thermal relay shall be mounted to protect the motor.
1.2.3 Running with Frequency higher than Standard Frequency
This inverter can provide output frequency of 0Hz to 1200Hz. If the user needs to run the inverter with frequency of more than 50Hz, please take the resistant pressure of the mechanical devices into consideration.
1.2.4 Vibration of Mechanical Device
8
OD9L User Manual
Safety and Precautions
The inverter may encounter the mechanical resonance point at certain output frequencies, which can be avoided by setting the skip frequency parameters in the inverter.
1.2.5 Motor Heat and Noise
Since the output voltage of inverter is PWM wave and contains certain harmonics, the temperature rise, noise and vibration of the motor will be higher than those when it runs at standard frequency.
1.2.6 Voltage-sensitive Device or Capacitor Improving Power Factor at the
Output Side
Since the inverter output is PWM wave, if the capacitor for improving the power factor or voltage-sensitive resistor for lightning protection is mounted at the output side, it is easy to cause instantaneous over current in the inverter, which may damage the inverter. It is recommended that such devices not be used.
1.2.7 Switching Devices like Contactors Used at the Input and Output terminal
If a contactor is installed between the power supply and the input terminal of the inverter, it is not allowed to use the contactor to control the startup/stop of the inverter. If use of such contactor is unavoidable, it shall be used with interval of at least one hour. Frequent charge and discharge will reduce the service life of the capacitor inside the inverter. If switching devices like contactor are installed between the output end of the inverter and the motor, it shall ensure that the on/off operation is conducted when the inverter has no output. Otherwise the modules in the inverter may be damaged.
1.2.8 Operating beyond the rated voltage range
It's not proper to use the inverter beyond the voltage range that specified in the instruction manual, or it's easy to damage the inner components of the inverter. Please use a proper step-up or step-down device to deal with the power supply before connecting to the inverter if it's necessary.
1.2.9 Change Three-phase Input to Two-phase Input
It is not allowed to change the CM series three-phase inverter into two-phase one. Otherwise, it may cause fault or damage to the inverter.
1.2.10 Lightning Impulse Protection
The series inverter has lightning over current protection device, and has certain self-protection capacity against the lightning. In applications where lightning occurs frequently, the user shall install additional protection devices at the front-end of the inverter.
1.2.11 Altitude and Derating
In areas with altitude of more than 1,000 meters, the heat sinking effect of the inverter may turn poorer due to rare air. Therefore, it needs to derate the inverter for use. Please contact our company for technical consulting in case of such condition.
9
Safety and Precautions
OD9L User Manual
1.2.12 Certain Special Use
If the user needs to use the inverter with the methods other than the recommended wiring diagram in this manual, such as shared DC bus, please consult our company.
1.2.13 Note of Inverter Disposal
The electrolytic capacitors on the main circuit and the PCB may explode when they are burnt. Emission of toxic gas may be generated when the plastic parts are burnt. Please dispose the inverter as industrial wastes.
1.2.14 Adaptable Motor
1) The standard adaptable motor is four-pole squirrel-cage asynchronous induction motor. If such motor is not available, be sure to select adaptable motors in according to the rated current of the motor. In applications where drive permanent magnetic synchronous motor is required, please consult our company;
2) The cooling fan and the rotor shaft of the non-variable-frequency motor adopt coaxial connection. When the rotating speed is reduced, the cooling effect will be poorer. Therefore, a powerful exhaust fan shall be installed, or the motor shall be replaced with variable-frequency motor to avoid the over heat of the motor.
3) Since the inverter has built-in standard parameters of the adaptable motors, it is necessary to perform motor parameter identification or modify the default values so as to comply with the actual values as much as possible, or it may affect the running effect and protection performance;
4) The short circuit of the cable or motor may cause alarm or explosion of the inverter. Therefore, please conduct insulation and short circuit test on the newly installed motor and cable. Such test shall also be conducted during routine maintenance. Please note that the inverter and the test part shall be completely disconnected during the test.
10
OD9L User Manual
Product Information
Chapter 2 Product Information
2.1 Naming Rules
OD9L
3S 2R2 G B
XX
Non Standard Series Define MarkNon Standard Series BlankStandard Series
Mark
Adaptable
Mark 2S 3S
Mark
B
Mark Adaptable Power,[kW]
R75 1R5
Fig.2-1 Naming Rules
2.2 Nameplate
011 015
MODEL: OD9L-3S2R2G
2.2KW
INPUT: AC 1PH 220~260V 50/60Hz
OUTPUT: AC 3PH 0~260V 0~600Hz 9.6A
SN:
BAR CODE
SHENZHEN OLEN ELECTRIC CO.,LTD
Fig.2-1 Nameplate
11
Product Information
OD9L User Manual
2.3 OD9L Inverter Series
Model
OD9L-3SR4G
OD9L-3SR75G
OD9L-3S1R5G OD9L-3S2R2G OD9L-4TR75GB
OD9L-4T1R5GB
OD9L-4T2R2GB
OD9L-4T4R0GB
OD9L-4T5R5GB
OD9L-4T7R5GB OD9L-4T011GB OD9L-4T015GB
OD9L-4T018GB OD9L-4T022GB OD9L-4T030GB OD9L-4T037G OD9L-4T045G OD9L-4T055G OD9L-4T075G OD9L-4T093G OD9L-4T110G OD9L-4T132G OD9L-4T160G OD9L-4T185G OD9L-4T200G OD9L-4T220G OD9L-4T250G OD9L-4T280G OD9L-4T315G OD9L-3TR4GB OD9L-3TR75GB OD9L-3T1R5GB OD9L-3T2R2GB OD9L-3T4R0GB
Tab.2-1 models and technical data of OD9L
Input voltage
Input current A
Output current A
Single phase:
5.4
2.3
220V
8.2
4.0
Range:
14.0
7.0
-15%20%
23.0
9.6
3.4
2.1
5.0/
3.8
5.8
5.1
10.5
9.0
14.6
13.0
20.5
17.0
Three phase: 380V Range -20%20%
Three phase: 220V Range -15%20%
26.0 35.0 38.5 46.5 62.0 76.0 92.0 113.0 157.0 180.0 214.0 256.0 307.0 345.0 385.0 430.0 468.0 525.0 590.0 3.4 5.0 5.8 10.5 14.6
25.0 32.0 37.0 45.0 60.0 75.0 90.0 110.0 152.0 176.0 210.0 253.0 304.0 340.0 380.0 426.0 465.0 520.0 585.0 2.1 3.8 5.5 9.0 13.0
Matched motorkW
0.4
0.75
1.5 2.2 0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0 75.0 93.0 110.0 132.0 160.0 185.0 200.0 220.0 250.0 280.0 315.0 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0
12
OD9L User Manual
Product Information
Model
OD9L-3T5R5GB OD9L-3T7R5GB OD9L-3T011GB OD9L-3T015GB OD9L-3T018G OD9L-3T022G OD9L-3T030G OD9L-3T037G OD9L-3T045G OD9L-3T055G OD9L-3T075G OD9L-3T090G
Input voltage
Input current A 26.0 35.0 46.5 62.0 76.0 92.0 113.0 157.0 180.0 214.0 307.0 385.0
Output current A 25.0 32.0 45.0 60.0 75.0 90.0 110.0 152.0 176.0 210.0 304.0 380.0
Matched motorkW
5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0 75.0 90.0
2.4 Technical Specification
Item
Maximum frequency
Carrier Frequency
Input frequency Main control resolution
functions Control mode
Specifications Vector control: 0~600Hz VF control:0~1200Hz 1k ~ 15kHz; the carrier frequency will be automatically adjusted according to the load characteristics. Digital setting: 0.01Hz Analog setting: maximum frequency ×0.1%
Open loop vector control ; V/F control.
Start-up torque
Mode G machine: 0.5Hz/180% (open loop vector control) Mode P machine: 0.5Hz/120% (Open loop vector control)
Speed adjustment range
1200Open loop Vector flux control
Stable speed Precision
Open loop Vector flux control±0.5% (rated synchronous speed)
Stabilization of speed control
Main control Torque response functions
Overload capacity
Open loop Vector flux control±0.3% (rated synchronous speed)
40ms(Open magnetic flux vector control)
Mode G machine: 150% rated current 60s; 180% rated current 5s
Torque boost
Automatic torque boost; manual torque boost 0.1% to 30.0%
V/F curve
Linear V/F, Multi-point V/F, and Square V/F 13
Product Information
OD9L User Manual
Speed-up and Speed-down curve
DC brake
Jog control Simple PLC and multi-speed running
Straight line or S curve speed-up and speed-down mode; four kinds of speed-up and speed-down time; Speed-up and speed-down time ranges from 0.0s to 3000.0s DC brake frequency: 0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency; brake time: 0.0s ~ 36.0s, and brake current value: 0.0% to 100.0%. Jog frequency range:0.00Hz ~ 50.00Hz; Jog speed-up/speed-down time: 0.0s ~ 3000.0s. It can realize a maximum of 16 segments speed running via the built-in PLC or control terminal.
Built-in PID
It is easy to realize process-controlled close loop control system.
AVRAutomatic It can keep constant output voltage automatically in case of voltage regulation change of mains voltage.
Torque limit and control
"Shovel" characteristics, automatic limit on the torque on running time, preventing frequent over-current trip; closed loop vector mode can realize the torque control
Customized functions
Peripherals self-detection upon power-on
Shared DC bus function
It can conduct safety detections on the peripherals upon power-on, including earth and short circuit detections.
It can realize the function that multiple inverters share the DC bus.
JOG key
Programmable key: Select the forward and reverse rotations/jog operation command.
Traverse frequency Multiple triangular-wave frequency control function. control
Fast current limit Customized function
functions
Timed control
With fast current limit algorithm built in to reduce the probability of over-current alarm; to improve the anti-jamming capacity of the whole machine.
Timing control function: Setting time range from 0h to 65535h.
Keyboard extension Customers can use standard cable to extend the keyboard line standardization
Operation function
Running command
Three types of channels: operation panel given, control terminal given and serial communication port given. These
channel
channels can be switched in various ways.
14
OD9L User Manual
Product Information
Item
Frequency source
Specifications
Ten types of frequency sources in total: digital given, analog voltage given, analog current given, pulse given, and serial port given. It can be switched in various ways.
Auxiliary frequency Ten types of auxiliary frequency sources in total. It can
source
implement micro tuning and synthesis of auxiliary frequency.
Input terminal
Five digital input terminals, and seven terminals in maximum (AI1, AI2 can be used as DI terminals), it has compatibility to PNP or NPN input method. Two analog input terminals, in which AI1 only be used for voltage input, and AI2 can be used as voltage or current input. (if expanded- input or output terminal function is needed, please use A700 series.)
Output terminal
One digital output terminal (bipolar output) Two relay output terminal Two analog output terminals, with optional 0/4mA to 20mA or 0/2V to 10V. It can realize the output of set frequency, output frequency and rotation speed etc.
LED display
Display parameter
Display and Keyboard Operate
LCD display Parameter copy
Selective parts, Chinese/English to suggest the operation content
Use parameter special copy keyboard can copy the parameter quickly
Key lock and function choose
Lock part of the keyboard or the whole keyboard, definite the function range of some keys to avoid mis-operation.
Protection and select accessories
protection function
Short circuit detective of power-on motor, input and output open-phase protection, over-current protection, overvoltage protection, under-voltage protection, over-heat protection, over-load protection etc.
Selective accessories LCD operation panel, brake group etc.
Suitable place
Indoor environment which is against from direct sunlight, dust, corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil mist, vapor, water drop and salt.
Environment Altitude
Ambient Temperature
Less than 1000m
-10 ~ +50 (derating is required if the natural temperature range is 40 ~ 50)
Humidity
Less than 95%RH, no condensing water drops 15
Product Information
Item
Vibration
Specifications Less than 5.9m/ s2 (0.6g)
Storage temperature -20 ~ +60
Class of pollution 2
Product standard
Safety standard EMC standard
IEC61800-5-1:2007 IEC61800-3:2005
OD9L User Manual
16
OD9L User Manual
Product Information
2.5 Physical Appearance and Dimensions of Mounting Hole
2.5.1 Product Appearance
Physical appearance of plastic structure
Physical appearance of sheet metal structure Fig.2-3 physical appearance of the series 17
Product Information
2.5.2 OD9L Mounting Hole Dimensions(mm)
W
W1
D
H H1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OD9L User Manual
Fig.2-4 Installation dimensions of plastic mode below 11 KW
W
W1
D
H H1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
Fig2-5 Installation dimensions of metal mode within 15~132KW
18
OD9L User Manual
W W1
Product Information
D
H H1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
Fig2-6 Installation dimensions of metal mode above185KW
Tab.2-3 mounting hole dimensions of OD9L
Mounting hole
Physical dimension
Model
A
B
H
W
D
OD9L-3SR4G OD9L-3SR75G OD9L-3S1R5G OD9L-3S2R2GB OD9L-3S4R0GB OD9L-3S5R5GB OD9L-4TR4GB OD9L-4TR75GB OD9L-4T1R5GB OD9L-4T2R2GB OD9L-4T4R0GB OD9L-4T5R5GB OD9L-4T7R5GB OD9L-4T011GB OD9L-4T015GB OD9L-4T018GB OD9L-4T022GB OD9L-4T030GB
(mm)
66 66 109 126 66
66
(mm)
150 137 193 236 150
137
(mm)
158 142 202 248 158
(mm)
75 75 119 138 75
(mm)
104 139 155 170 104
142
75
139
109
193
202
119
155
126
236
248
138
170
150
302
312
184
186
160
342
353
210
200
19
Diameter of mounting hole
(mm)
4.5 4.5 5 5.5 4.5
4.5
5
5.5
6 6
Product Information
Model
OD9L-4T037G OD9L-4T045G OD9L-4T055G OD9L-4T075G OD9L-4T093G OD9L-4T110G OD9L-4T132G OD9L-4T160G OD9L-4T185G OD9L-4T200G OD9L-4T220G OD9L-4T250G OD9L-4T280G OD9L-4T315G OD9L-3TR4GB OD9L-3TR75GB OD9L-3T1R5GB OD9L-3T2R2GB OD9L-3T4R0GB OD9L-3T5R5GB OD9L-3T7R5GB OD9L-3T011GB OD9L-3T015GB OD9L-3T018G OD9L-3T022G OD9L-3T030G OD9L-3T037G OD9L-3T045G OD9L-3T055G OD9L-3T075G OD9L-3T090G
Mounting hole
A
B
(mm)
(mm)
200
426
245
514
290
539
320
682
360
973
380
1048
500
1238
66
150
66
137
109
193
121
231
150
302
160
342
200
426
245
514
290
539
320
682
360
973
OD9L User Manual
Physical dimension
H
W
D
(mm) (mm) (mm)
Diameter of mounting hole
(mm)
440
257
200
7
530
310
255
10
555
350
262
10
700
430
290
10
1000
470
318
12
1075
520
338
12
1270
630
425
158
75
104
142
75
139
202
119
155
248
138
170
12 4.5 4.5 5 5.5
312
184
186
6
353
210
200
6
440
257
200
7
530
310
255
555
350
262
700
430
290
1000
470
318
10 10 10 12
20
OD9L User Manual
Product Information
Under 11Kw(4T:380V 11
Upper 15Kw(4T:380V 15.0)
Tab.2-4 Wall-mounted mode installation dimensions of OD9L under30KW
Mounting hole
Physical dimension
Diameter
Model
OD9L-3S2R2GB OD9L-4T4R0GB OD9L-4T5R5GB OD9L-4T7R5GB OD9L-4T011GB OD9L-4T015GB OD9L-4T018GB OD9L-4T022GB OD9L-4T030GB
A
B
(mm) (mm)
109 193
109 193
H
(mm)
203 203
H1 (mm) 180 180
W (mm) 120 120
W1 (mm)
98
of moun -ting hole
(mm) 4.5
98 4.5
126 235
249
224
139
115 5.5
140 329
291
/
185
/
8
150 362
326
/
211
/
8
21
Product Information
OD9L User Manual
2.5.3 Mounting dimension of outer keyboard with plate and those without plate(mm)
Fig.2-7.1 small outer keyboard with plate installation dimensionStandard configuration small outer keyboard under 4T:380V 4.0kW
Fig.2-7.1 small outer keyboard with plate installation dimension (Standard configuration medium outer keyboard 4.045kw)
22
OD9L User Manual
Product Information
Fig.2-7.2 big outer keyboard with plate installation dimension (Standard configuration big outer keyboard above 55kw)
Fig.2-8.1 small outer keyboard without plate installation dimension (Standard configuration small outer keyboard under 45kw) 23
Product Information
OD9L User Manual
22
68
70 13
59
95
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
16
93 70
40 17
Fig.2-8.2 big outer keyboard without plate installation dimension (Standard configuration big outer keyboard above 55kw)
2.6 Optional Parts
If the user needs such optional parts, please specify when placing the order. Tab.1-5 OD9L Inverters Optional Parts
Name
Built-in brake unit
External LED operating panel
Model The letter "B" attached behind the product model
OD9L-LED
Function
Braking
External LED display and keyboard
Remarks
Built-in as standard A series universal The RJ45 interface
External LCD operating panel
OD9L-LCD
Parameter copy keyboard
OD9L-LED2
Extension cable OD9L-CAB
External LCD display and keyboard
The copy function keyboard with parameters Standard 8 core cable, can and OD9L-LED, OD9L-LCD,OD9L-LED 2, connection
The RJ45 interface
A series universal RJ45 interface
Providing 1 meters, 3 meters, 5 meters, 10 meters, totally 4 kinds of specifications
24
OD9L User Manual
Product Information
If you need other function module extensions (such as: I/O card, PG card, EPS card and so on), please use theA700 series inverter, specifying the order function module card when ordering.
2.7 Routine Repair and Maintenance of Inverter
2.7.1 Routine Repair
The influence of the ambient temperature, humidity, dust and vibration will cause the aging of the devices in the inverter, which may cause potential fault of the inverter or reduce the service life of the inverter. Therefore, it is necessary to carry out routine and periodical maintenance on the inverter.
Routine inspection Items include: 1) Whether there is any abnormal change in the running sound of the motor; 2) Whether the motor has vibration during the running; 3) Whether there is any change to the installation environment of the inverter; 4) Whether the inverter cooling fan works normally; 5) Whether the inverter has over temperature;
Routine cleaning: The inverter shall be kept clean all the time. The dust on the surface of the inverter shall be effectively removed, so as to prevent the dust entering the inverter. Especially the metal dust is not allowed. The oil stain on the inverter cooling fan shall be effectively removed.
2.7.2 Periodic Inspection
Please perform periodic inspection on the places where the inspection is a difficult thing. Periodic inspection Items include:
1) Check and clean the air duct periodically; 2) Check if the screws are loosened; 3) Check if the inverter is corroded; 4) Check if the wire connector has arc signs; 5) Main circuit insulation test; Remainder: When using the megameter (DC 500V megameter recommended) to measure the insulating resistance, the main circuit shall be disconnected with the inverter. Do not use the insulating resistance meter to control the insulation of the circuit. It is not necessary to conduct the high voltage test (which has been completed upon delivery).
2.7.3 Replacement of Vulnerable Parts for Inverter
The vulnerable parts of the inverter include cooling fan and filter electrolytic capacitor,
whose life depends on the operating environment and maintenance status. Common service life:
Part name
Life time
Fan
2 to 3 years
Electrolytic capacitor 4 to 5 years The user can determine the term for replacement according to the running time.
25
Product Information
OD9L User Manual
1) Cooling fan Possible causes for damage: bearing wearing and blade aging. Criteria: Whether there is crack on the blade and whether there is abnormal vibration noise upon startup. 2) Filter electrolytic capacitor Possible causes for damage of filter electrolytic capacitor: Poor input source quality, high ambient temperature, frequent load jumping and burning electrolyte. Criteria: Whether there is liquid leakage, whether the safe valve has projected, measure the static capacitance, and measure the insulating resistance.
2.7.4 Storage of Inverter
Attention shall be paid to the following points for the temporary and long-term storage of the inverter:
1) Place the inverter back into the packing box following the original package; 2) Long-term storage will degrade the electrolytic capacitor. The product shall be powered up
once every 2 years, and the power-up time shall be no less than 5 hours. The input voltage shall be increased slowly to the rated value with the regulator.
2.8 Warranty of Inverter
Free repair warranty is just for inverter itself. 1. Warranty instruction of product for domestic use. guarantee for repair, exchange and return of the inverter within 1 month after the delivery. guarantee for repair and exchange within 3 months after the delivery. guarantee for repair with 15 months after the delivery or within 18 months after the date of production as indicated on the barcode. 2. Products exported to overseas area (excluding domestic area) have repair warranty on the purchase place with 6 month after the delivery. 3. Reasonable fees will be charged due to the expiration of the warranty period. 4. Reasonable fees will be charged for the following situations within the warranty period. The machine is damaged for the reason that the user didn't operate it according to the manual. The damage is caused by force majeure like flood, fire or abnormal voltage etc. The damage is caused for the inverter been used in abnormal function. The P-type (fan, water bump type) inverter is used as the G-type (general type). Tear off the nameplate and serial number without authorization. 5. We only take responsibility for item 1 or item 2 if there were any product accident, for more compensation, please insure for the goods previously for property insurance. The service charge is counted according to the standard rules made by the company; the contract takes the priority if there is any agreement previous.
2.9 Guide to Select Brake Components
What in below Tab.2-6 are the guide data, the user can choose different resistance and power according to the practical situation, (the resistance value must not less than the recommended one; the power value can be more) the brake resistance should be chosen according to the
26
OD9L User Manual
Product Information
real power of the motor when used in practical system. It is related to system inertia, speed decelerating time and potential energy load etc, the customer should choose it based on the real circumstance. The bigger inertia of the system; the shorter time of speed decelerating; the more frequent of the brake; the bigger power and smaller resistance of the brake resistor need to be with.
2.9.1 How to choose the resistance
When braking, almost all the recovery energy of the motor is spent on the braking resistance. It follows the formula: U*U/R=Pb
U---the braking voltage of the stable braking system (the value is different in different system. Generally for 380VAC, the value is 700V)
Pb---the braking power
2.9.2 How to choose the power of the braking resistor
The power of the braking resistor is same as the braking power theoretically, but taking into consideration that the derating is 70%. It follows the formula: 0.7*Pr=Pb*D
Pr---the power of the braking resistor D---the braking ratio (the ratio which the reactivation process divides the whole working process), generally take 10% as its value. You can refer to the details in below chart.
Application industry
ratio
elevator 20% 30%
Winding and unwinding machine
2030%
centrifuge 50%60%
Accidental braking load
5%
Inverter model
OD9L-3SR4G OD9L-3SR75G
Tab.2-6 selection of OD9L inverter brake components
Braking torque 150%,5S
recommended resistance value, power and brake
unit model 2200.4KW Optional brake unit 1500.6KW Optional brake unit
Braking torque Braking torque
100%,15S
50%,15S
recommended
recommended
resistance value, resistance value,
power and brake unit power and brake
model
unit model
3000.3KW 3000.3KW
Optional brake unit Optional brake unit
1500.6KW 3000.3KW
Optional brake unit Optional brake unit
OD9L-3S1R5G
601KW
1000.8KW 1500.6KW
Optional brake unit Optional brake unit Optional brake unit
OD9L-3S2R2GB
40,1.2KW
601KW
1500.6KW
build-in brake unit build-in brake unit build-in brake unit
OD9L-3S4R0GB
60,1.5KW build-in brake unit
27
75,1KW
100,0.8KW
build-in brake unit build-in brake unit
Product Information
Inverter model
OD9L-3S5R5GB OD9L-4TR75GB OD9L-4T1R5GB OD9L-4T2R2GB OD9L-4T4R0GB OD9L-4T5R5GB OD9L-4T7R5GB OD9L-4T011GB OD9L-4T015GB OD9L-4T018GB OD9L-4T022GB
OD9L-4T030G
OD9L-4T037G OD9L-4T045G OD9L-4T055G OD9L-4T075G OD9L-4T093G OD9L-4T110G
OD9L User Manual
Braking torque 150%,5S
recommended resistance value, power and brake
unit model
40 ,2KW build-in brake unit
Braking torque 100%,15S
recommended resistance value, power and brake unit
model
Braking torque 50%,15S
recommended resistance value, power and brake
unit model
50,1.5KW
60,1KW
build-in brake unit build-in brake unit
3000.3KW build-in brake unit
3000.3KW 3000.3KW build-in brake unit build-in brake unit
1500.5KW build-in brake unit
2200.4KW 3000.3KW build-in brake unit build-in brake unit
1000.8KW build-in brake unit 751.0KW build-in brake unit 601.2KW build-in brake unit 402KW build-in brake unit 304KW build-in brake unit 244KW build-in brake unit
1300.6KW build-in brake unit 1000.8KW build-in brake unit 751.0KW build-in brake unit 501.5KW build-in brake unit 402KW build-in brake unit 304KW build-in brake unit
1500.5KW build-in brake unit 1300.6KW build-in brake unit 1000.8KW build-in brake unit 601.2KW build-in brake unit 501.5KW build-in brake unit 402KW build-in brake unit
13.68KW build-in brake unit
304KW
402KW
build-in brake unit build-in brake unit
13.68KW
246KW
304KW
Brake unit built-in asBrake unit built-in asBrake unit built-in
optional
optional
as optional
1012KW
246KW
246KW
BR500-4T075
BR500-4T037
BR500-4T037
6.812KW BR500-4T132
1012KW BR500-4T075
13.68KW BR500-4T075
2*6.812KW BR500-4T200
6.812KW BR500-4T132
28
6.812KW BR500-4T132
OD9L User Manual
Product Information
Inverter model OD9L-4T132G
Braking torque 150%,5S
recommended resistance value, power and brake
unit model
Braking torque 100%,15S
recommended resistance value, power and brake unit
model
Braking torque 50%,15S
recommended resistance value, power and brake
unit model
OD9L-4T160G OD9L-4T185G OD9L-4T200G
3*6.812KW 2*6.812KW 2*6.812KW
BR500-4T315
BR500-4T200
BR500-4T200
OD9L-3TR4GB OD9L-3TR75GB OD9L-3T1R5GB OD9L-3T2R2GB
OD9L-3T4R0GB
OD9L-3T5R5GB
OD9L-3T7R5GB
OD9L-3T011GB
OD9L-3T015GB OD9L-3T018G OD9L-3T022G OD9L-3T030G OD9L-3T037G OD9L-3T045G OD9L-3T055G
3000.2KW build-in brake unit
1500.3KW build-in brake unit
1000.4KW build-in brake unit 750.5KW build-in brake unit 401.0KW build-in brake unit 301.2KW build-in brake unit 13.63.7KW build-in brake unit 13.63.7KW build-in brake unit
3000.2KW 3000.2KW build-in brake unit build-in brake unit
2200.25KW 3000.2KW build-in brake unit build-in brake unit
1300.4KW build-in brake unit 1000.4KW build-in brake unit 500.7KW build-in brake unit 401.0KW build-in brake unit 301.2KW build-in brake unit 242KW build-in brake unit
1500.3KW build-in brake unit 1300.4KW build-in brake unit 600.5KW build-in brake unit 500.7KW build-in brake unit 401.0KW build-in brake unit 304KW build-in brake unit
6.88.0KW BR500-4T132
104.5KW 13.63.7KW
BR500-4T075
BR500-4T075
2*(6.8,8.0KW) 6.88.0KW 6.88.0KW
BR500-4T200
BR500-4T132
BR500-4T132
OD9L-3T075G OD9L-3T090G
3*(6.88.0KW) 2*(6.88.0KW)2*(6.88.0KW)
BR500-4T315
BR500-4T200
BR500-4T200
Attention: 1. The braking resistance value can't be less than the recommended data, if it exceeding the recommended data it may damage the braking unit. 2. What's in the table "×2" means 2 brake resistor used in parallel, "×3" means 3 brake resistor
29
Product Information
OD9L User Manual
used in parallel. For others can be done in the same manner. 3. It's the standard build-in brake unit inverter model if there is a "B" following after the model
name, if not, no build-in brake unit. Please choose the corresponding brake unit model according to the brake torque. 4. 18.5~30KW selectable build-in brake unit of G type inverter. Please declare it on the order requirement that you need the standard configuration without brake unit if it's needed. 5. What in the tale "5S, 15S" means the continuous braking time.
30
OD9L User Manual
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation
3.1 Mechanical Installation
3.1.1 Installation environment
1) Ambient temperature: The ambient temperature exerts great influences on the service life of the inverter and is not allowed to exceed the allowable temperature range (-10 Celsius to 50 Celsius).
2) The inverter shall be mounted on the surface of incombustible articles, with sufficient spaces nearby for heat sinking. The inverter is easy to generate large amount of heat during the operation. The inverter shall be mounted vertically on the base with screws.
3) The inverter shall be mounted in the place without vibration or with vibration of less than 0.6G, and shall be kept away from such equipment as punching machine.
4) The inverter shall be mounted in locations free from direct sunlight, high humidity and condensate.
5) The inverter shall be mounted in locations free from corrosive gas, explosive gas or combustible gas.
6) The inverter shall be mounted in locations free from oil dirt, dust, and metal powder.
Fig.3-1 single one installation illustration Tips: please use heat baffle showed in the picture when the inverters are mounted one in the top of the other one.
31
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
OD9L User Manual
Fig.3-2 OD9L installation illustration
3.1.2 We should watch out the heat dissipation problem during installation. Pay
attention to the following items:
1) Install the inverter vertically so that the heat may be expelled from the top. However, the equipment cannot be installed upside down. If there are multiple inverters in the cabinet, parallel installation is better. In the applications where up-down installation is required, please install the thermal insulating guide plate referring to the schematic diagrams for standalone installation and up-down installation.
2) The mounting space shall be as indicated as the above diagrams, so as to ensure the heat sinking space of the inverter. However, the heat sinking of other devices in the cabinet shall also be considered.
3) The installation bracket must be made of flame retardant materials. 4) In the applications where there are metal powders, it is recommended to install the radiator outside the cabinet. In this case, the space inside the sealed cabinet shall be large as much as possible.
3.1.3 Mechanical installation method and steps.
It has plastic and sheet metal structure of OD9L series. 1. Plastic structure wall-mounted installation Installation instruction: 1) take off the backplane of the inverter;
32
OD9L User Manual
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
2) place the inverter in the cabinet with right installation dimension and mounting holes, and fixed with screws (M4*12) and screw nuts (M4);
3) install back the backplane of the inverter; Diameter of Wall-mounted holes is as table 2-4.
Fig.3-3. OD9L Wall-mounted installation instruction of plastic structure
2. Sheet metal structure wall-mounted installation Installation instruction: 1) install the flange hook to the top and the bottom of the inverter; 2) place the inverter in the cabinet with right installation dimension and mounting holes, and
fixed with screws (M6) and screw nuts;
Fig.3-4 OD9L Wall-mounted installation instruction of sheet metal structure 33
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
OD9L User Manual
3.2Electrical Installation
3.2.1 Guide to choose peripheral electrical components
Tab.3-1 guide to choose peripheral electrical components of OD9L
Inverter Model
Circuit Breaker (MCCB) (A)
Contactor (A)
Input Side Main Circuit Wire (mm²)
Output Side Main Circuit Wire (mm²)
Control Circuit Wire (mm²)
OD9L-3SR4G
10
9
0.75
0.75
0.5
OD9L-3SR75G
10
9
0.75
0.75
0.5
OD9L-3S1R5G
16
16
2.5
2.5
0.75
OD9L-3S2R2G
16
16
2.5
2.5
0.75
OD9L-3S4R0GB
20
18
2.5
2.5
0.75
OD9L-3S5R5GB
50
32
4.0
4.0
1.0
OD9L-4TR75GB
6
9
0.75
0.75
0.5
OD9L-4T1R5GB
10
OD9L-4T2R2GB
10
9
0.75
0.75
0.5
9
0.75
0.75
0.5
OD9L-4T4R0GB
16
16
2.5
2.5
0.75
OD9L-4T5R5GB
20
18
2.5
2.5
0.75
OD9L-4T7R5GB
32
25
4.0
4.0
1.0
OD9L-4T011GB
50
32
4.0
4.0
1.0
OD9L-4T015GB
63
40
6.0
6.0
1.0
OD9L-4T018GB
63
40
10
10
1.0
OD9L-4T022GB
80
50
10
10
1.0
OD9L-4T030G
100
65
16
16
1.0
OD9L-4T037G
125
80
25
25
1.0
OD9L-4T045G
160
115
35
35
1.0
OD9L-4T055G
160
150
50
50
1.0
OD9L-4T075G
225
170
70
70
1.0
OD9L-4T093G
250
205
95
95
1.0
OD9L-4T110G
315
245
120
120
1.0
OD9L-4T132G
350
300
120
120
1.0
Earth Wire mm²
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4 6 6 10 16 16 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
34
OD9L User Manual
Inverter Model
OD9L-4T160G OD9L-4T185G OD9L-4T200G OD9L-3TR4GB OD9L-3TR75GB OD9L-3T1R1GB OD9L-3T2R2GB OD9L-3T4R0GB OD9L-3T5R5GB OD9L-3T7R5GB OD9L-3T011GB OD9L-3T015GB OD9L-3T018G OD9L-3T022G OD9L-3T030G OD9L-3T037G OD9L-3T045G OD9L-3T055G OD9L-3T075G OD9L-3T090G
Circuit Breaker (MCCB) (A)
400 500 500 6 10 10 20 32 40 50 63 100 100 125 160 225 250 315 500 630
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Contactor (A)
400 410 410 9 9 9 12 25 32 40 50 65 80 115 150 170 205 245 400 500
Input Side Main Circuit Wire (mm²)
150 185 185 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 240
Output Side Main Circuit Wire (mm²)
150 185 185 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 240
Control Circuit Wire (mm²)
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Earth Wire mm²
25 25 25 2.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 6 6 16 16 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
35
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
OD9L User Manual
3.2.2 Using instruction of peripheral electrical components
Tab.3-2 Using instruction of the peripheral electrical components of OD9L
Part Name Installation Location Function Description
Circuit breaker Contactor
AC input reactor
DC reactor
The front-end of the input circuit Between the circuit breaker and the inverter input side
Input side of the inverter
DC reactor is optional for 75KW~ 132KW A series inverter, but standard for the 160KW above.
Disconnect the power supply in case of downstream equipment is over current.
Power-on and power-off operation of the inverter. Frequent power-on/power-off operation (more than 2 times per minute) on the inverter or direct start shall be avoided.
1) Improve the power factor of the input side. 2) Eliminate the high order harmonics of the input side effectively, and prevent other equipment from damaging due to voltage waveform deformation. 3) Eliminate the input current unbalance due to the unbalance among the phase of input. 1) Improve the power factor of the input side. 2) Eliminate the high order harmonics of the input side effectively, and prevent other equipment from damaging due to voltage waveform deformation.
EMC input filter
Input side of the inverter
AC output reactor
Between the inverter output side and the motor, close to the inverter
1) Reduce the external conduction and radiation interference of the inverter; 2) Reduce the conduction interference flowing from the power end to the inverter, thus improving the anti-interference capacity of the inverter. The inverter output side generally has higher harmonic. When the motor is far from the inverter, since there are many capacitors in the circuit, certain harmonics will cause resonance in the circuit and bring in the following results: 1Degrade the motor insulation performance and damage the motor for the long run. 2) Generate large leakage current and cause frequent inverter protection action. 3) In general, if the distance between the inverter and the motor exceeds 100 meters, output AC reactor shall be installed.
36
OD9L User Manual
3.2.3 Typical wiring
AC single- L phase 220V
power N supply
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Braking resistor (optional)
(+)
PB
R
U
S
V
M
T
W
Multifunctional digital input terminal 1
Multifunctional digital input terminal 2
Multifunctional digital input terminal 3
Multifunctional digital input terminal 4
+24V
PNP X NPN
X1 Default FWD
X2 Default REV
X3
X7
485+ 485-
Ma tchi ng resi stor selection
AO1
I AO1U
GND
Serial communication
port
Choose analog output voltage mode or current
mode
Analog output 1 0/2~10V 0/4~20mA
COM
Analog input 0~10V/0~20mA
dial switch choose voltage or current
give
+10V
AI1 AI2 GND I AI2 U
Y1
CME COM
Multi-function bipolar open circuit
collector output terminal
TA
TB Relay
output 1
TC
Fig.3-5 single-phase inverter under 2.2KW 37
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Braking resistor (optional)
AC threephase 380V
power supply
(+)
PB
R
U
S
V
T
W
OD9L User Manual M
Multifunctional digital input terminal 1
Multifunctional digital input terminal 2
Multifunctional digital input terminal 3
Multifunctional digital input terminal 4
+24V
PNP X NPN
X1 Default FWD
X2 Default REV
X3
X7
485+ 485-
Ma tchi ng resi stor selection
AO1
I AO1U
GND
Serial communication
port
Choose analog output voltage mode or current
mode
Analog output 1 0/2~10V 0/4~20mA
COM
Analog input 0~10V/0~20mA
dial switch choose voltage or current
give
+10V
AI1 AI2 GND I AI2 U
Y1
CME COM
Multi-function bipolar open circuit
collector output terminal
TA
TB Relay
output 1
TC
Fig.3-6 three-phase inverter under 2.2KW 38
OD9L User Manual
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Braking resistor
(-)
(+)
PB
AC three-
R
phase 380V power
S
supply
T
U
V
M
W
Multifunctional digital input terminal 1
Multifunctional digital input terminal 2
Multifunctional digital input terminal 3
Multifunctional digital input terminal 4
Multifunctional digital input terminal 5
Multifunctional digital input terminal 6
Multifunctional digital input terminal 7
+24V
J5 NPN PNP
X1 Default FWD
X2 Default REV
X3
X4 X5
X6 HX7
COM
Analog input 0~10V/0~20mA
CN3 dial switch choose voltage or
current give
+10V
AI1 AI2 J6 GND I U
485+ 485-
J3 AO1 I U GND J4 AO2 I U GND
Y1
CME COM
Serial communication
port Choose analog output voltage mode or current mode through the CN2
CN7 Analog output 1 0/2~10V 0/4~20mA
Analog output 2 0/2~10V 0/4~20mA
Multi-function bipolar open circuit
collector output terminal
TA
TB Relay
output 1
TC
Fig.3-7 three-phase inverter between4.0kw ~ 30KW 39
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
AC threephase 380V
power supply
Braking resistor
BR500
(-)
(+)
R
U
S
V
T
W
OD9L User Manual M
Multifunctional digital input terminal 1
Multifunctional digital input terminal 2
Multifunctional digital input terminal 3
Multifunctional digital input terminal 4
Multifunctional digital input terminal 5
Multifunctional digital input terminal 6
Multifunctional digital input terminal 7
+24V
J5
NPN
PNP
X1 Default FWD
X2 Default REV
X3
X4 X5
X6 HX7
COM
Analog input 0~10V/0~20mA
CN3 dial switch choose voltage or
current give
+10V
AI1 AI2 J6 GND I U
485+ 485-
J3 AO1 I U GND J4 AO2 I U GND
Y1
CME COM
Serial communication
port
Choose analog output voltage mode or current mode through the CN2
CN7 Analog output 1 0/2~10V 0/4~20mA
Analog output 2 0/2~10V 0/4~20mA
Multi-function bipolar open circuit
collector output terminal
TA
TB Relay
output 1
TC
Fig.3-8 three-phase inverter within 37KW~75KW Attention:
OD9L series between 37~75kw brake unit is the selective part, please declare it in order
request if it's needed. The wiring diagram of braking unit function is selected and shown in
FIG. 3-7. 40
OD9L User Manual
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
DC reactor
Braking resistor
BR500
P1 (+)
(-)
AC three-
R
phase 380V power
S
supply
T
U
V
M
W
Multifunctional digital input terminal 1
Multifunctional digital input terminal 2
Multifunctional digital input terminal 3
Multifunctional digital input terminal 4
Multifunctional digital input terminal 5
Multifunctional digital input terminal 6
Multifunctional digital input terminal 7
+24V
J5
NPN
PNP
X1 Default FWD
X2 Default REV
X3
X4 X5
X6 HX7
COM
Analog input 0~10V/0~20mA
CN3 dial switch choose voltage or
current give
+10V
AI1 AI2 J6 GND I U
485+ 485-
J3 AO1 I U GND J4 AO2 I U GND
Y1
CME COM
Serial communication
port
Choose analog output voltage mode or current mode through the CN2
CN7 Analog output 1 0/2~10V 0/4~20mA
Analog output 2 0/2~10V 0/4~20mA
Multi-function bipolar open circuit
collector output terminal
TA
TB Relay
output 1
TC
Fig.3-9 three-phase inverter above 93KW 41
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
OD9L User Manual
3.2.4 Main circuit terminals and wiring
Main circuit terminals of single-phase
Terminal L1L2 P(+)(-) P(+)PB UVW
Terminal Name
Single-phase power supply input terminals Positive and negative terminals of DC bus Connecting terminals of braking resistor
Output terminals
Grounding terminal
Main circuit terminals of three-phase
Description Connect to the single-phase 220 VAC power supply Common DC bus input point.
Connect to a braking resistor
Connect to a three-phase motor. Must be grounded.
Terminal RST P(+)(-)
P(+)PB UVW
Terminal Name
Description
Three-phase power supply input Connect to the three-phase AC power
terminals
supply.
Positive and negative terminals of DC bus
Common DC bus input point.
Connecting terminals of braking resistor
Connect to the braking resistor for the AC drive of 7.5 kW and below (220 V) and18.5kW and below (other voltage classes).
Output terminals
Connect to a three-phase motor.
Grounding terminal
Must be grounded.
Wiring precautions:
Input power supply LN or RST
No phase sequence requirement in the input side wiring of the inverter. DC bus P(+)()
Pay attention that there is remaining voltage on DC bus P()just after a power failure, only wait until the power indicate LED is off and 10 minutes after the power off, can we start the wiring operation, or there is risk of electric shock.
The wire length of the brake unit should be no more than 10m, and we should use the twisted pair and tight wire for wiring.
Don't connect the brake resistor to the DC bus directly, or it may damage the inverter and cause fire. Connection terminals of brake resistor P(+)PB
How to choose the brake resistor refer to the recommended value and the wiring distance should be less than 5m, or it may damage the inverter. Output side of the inverter UVW
The capacitor or surge absorber can't be connected to the output side of the inverter, or it may damage the inverter.
42
OD9L User Manual
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
If the motor cable is too long, for the influence of the distribute capacitance, it's easily to have electrical resonance, causing the damage of the insulation or large leakage current which make the inverter over-current protection. If the length of motor cable is more than 100m, a AC output reactor should be installed near the inverter.
3.2.5 Control circuit terminals and wiring
The control circuit terminals displayed as below:
10V AI1 AI2 485- X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 COM GND AO1 AO2 485+ X6 HX7 COM CME Y1/FM 24V
TA TB TC
Three-phase above 380V 4.0KW
10V AI1 AI2 X1 X2 X3 X7 GND GND AO1 GND 485+ 485- GND Y1 24V
TA TB TC
Three-phase under 220V/380V 2.2KW Function instruction of the control terminals
Category Power source Analog input Digital input
Tab.3-3 control interface function declaration of OD9L
Terminal
Terminal Name Function Description
+10V-GND
+24V-COM AI1-GND AI2-GND
External +10 V power supply
External +24 V power supply Analog input 1
Analog input 2
Provide +10 V power supply to external unit, maximum output current: 10 mA Generally, it provides power supply to external potentiometer with resistance range of 15 k. Provide +24 V power supply to external unit. Generally, it provides power supply to DI/DO terminals and external sensors. Maximum output current: 200 mA 1) Input voltage range: 010 VDC 2) Impedance: 100k 1) Input range: 010 VDC/420 mA, decided by CN3 dial switches on the control board 2) Impedance: 100 k (voltage input), 500 (current input)
DI1(X1)-COM DI2(X2)-COM DI3(X3)-COM DI4(X4)-COM DI5(X5)-COM DI6(X6)-COM
Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Digital input 3 Digital input 4 Digital input 5 Digital input 6
1) Optical coupling isolation, compatible with dual-polarity input. Switch over through DI dial switch, factory set PNP mode. 2) Impedance: 3.3 k. 3) Input voltage range: 9 ~30V 4) HDI5 can be used as high-speed input
43
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
OD9L User Manual
HDI7(HX7)-COM Digital input7
Analog output
AO1-GND AO2-GND
Analog output 1 Analog output 2
Digital output
Y1-COME
Digital output 1
Communication interface
485+,485-
Modbus Communication terminal
Relay output 1
Keyboard extended line
interface
T/A-T/B T/A-T/C
CN6
NC terminal
NO terminal
External operation panel interface
port.
Voltage or current output is decided by dial switches CN2 and CN7. Output voltage range: 010 V Output current range: 020 mA Optical coupling isolation, dual polarity open collector output Output voltage range: 024 V Output current range: 050 mA Note that CME and COM are internally isolated, but they are short circuit externally when leaving factory (In this case Y1 is driven by +24 V by default). If you want to drive Y1 by external power supply, the external short circuit of CME and COM must be switched off. Modbus communication interface, it can choose the communication matched resistance through dial switch CN4. If Profibus communication function is needed, please choose A700 series of inverter, and use profibus DP card. Contact driving capacity: AC 250V, 3 A, COSø = 0.4 DC 30V, 1A External operation panel and parameter copy panel interface, take out the bidirectional crystal head, it can expand the standard network cable.
Signal input terminals wiring instruction
1) AI analog input Since the weak analog voltage signal is easy to suffer external interferences, it needs to employ
shielded cable generally and the length shall be no longer than 20 meters, as shown in Fig. 3-10. In case the analog signal is subject to severe interference, and analog signal source side shall be installed with filter capacitor or ferrite magnetic core.
44
OD9L User Manual Potentiometer
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
10V AI1 GND
Fig.3-10 Schematic Diagram for Connection of Input Terminal of Analog Signal
2) Digital input terminal:
X termi nal connecti on Mode 1Default: DI dial switch in NPN mode and without external
power supply 24V X1(Default FWD)
X2(Default REV)
X3
X4 OD9L
X5 X6 HX7
Shielded cable single-end earthed COM
X terminal connection Mode 2: DI dial switch in NPN mode and with external power supply
DC930V
24V X1(Default FWD)
X2(Default REV)
X3
X4 OD9L
X5 X6 HX7
COM Shielded cable single-end earthed
X termi nal connecti on Mode 3: DI dial switch in PNP mode and without external power supply
X terminal connection Mode 4: DI dial switch in PNP mode and with external power supply
24V
X1(Default FWD) X2(Default REV) X3
OD9L
X4
X5 X6 HX7
Shielded cable single-end COM earthed
DC930V
Shielded cable singleend earthed
24V X1(Default FWD)
X2(Default REV)
X3
OD9L
X4
X5
X6
HX7
COM
Fig 3-11 Four different wiring diagram
45
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
OD9L User Manual
It needs to employ shielded cable generally, with cable length of no more than 20 meters. When active driving is adopted, necessary filtering measures shall be taken to prevent the interference to the power supply. It is recommended to use the contact control mode.
3) Y1 Digital output terminal:
When the digital output terminal needs the drive relay, absorption diode shall be installed at the two sides of the relay coil and the drive capacity should be no more than 50mA. Otherwise it may easily damage DC 24 power supply.
Caution: The absorption diode shall be installed with correct polarity, as shown in Fig.2-12, otherwise, when it has output on the digital output terminal, the DC 24V power supply will be damaged immediately.
Fig.3-12 Schematic diagram for digital output terminal Y1 wiring
46
Operation and Display
OD9L User Manual
Chapter 4 Operation and Display
4.1 Operation and Display Interface Introduction
We can change the function parameter, monitor the working status and control (start up/stop) the running inverter through the operation panel. The appearance and function are like below:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig.4-1 schematic diagram of operation panel (standard LED keyboard )
4.1.1 Description of Function LED Indicator
LED Symbol Hz
Unit Freq. Unit
Implication
LED on-- current parameter is frequency value
Color Green
Unit LED
A
Current Unit LED on-- current parameter is current value Green
V
Voltage Unit LED on-- current parameter is voltage value Green
RPM (Hz+A)
Speed Unit
LED on --current parameter is rotation speed Green value
Function LED
% (Hz+V )
RUN
Percentage
running status LED
LED on--current parameter is percentage Green value
LED on--in the status of running Light off--in the status of stop LED flash--in the status of sleep
Green
47
Operation and Display
OD9L User Manual
LED Symbol L/D/C
FWD/RE V
TUNE/T C
Unit control mode
LED
running direction LED
tuning/torque /fault LED
Implication
LED off--in the status of keyboard control mode LED on--in the status of terminal control mode LED flash--in the status of remote communication control mode
LED off--in the status of forward rotation LED on--in the status of reverse rotation LED flash--the target frequency is opposite to the actual frequency or in the status of reverse-run prohibition
LED on--in the status of torque control LED flash--tuning/fault
Color Red
Red
Red
4.1.2 LED display
Five digits LED is able to display setup frequency, output frequency, various monitoring data and alarm code. Function codes are usually displayed as decimal digits. For example, function code A0-11 is displayed as "50.00", means decimal digit "50". When the function codes are displayed as hexadecimal digits, the highest bit is "H.", means present function code value is displayed in hexadecimal way. For example, when function code A7-29 is displayed as "H.003F", the value of A7-29 is hexadecimal number"0x3f"
The user can freely set the monitoring data of stop and running status by the function code A7-29/A7-30, all the details are showed as function code A7-29/A7-30.
4.1.3. Keyboard instruction
Tab.4-1 keyboard function table
Key
Name
Function
PRG/ESC
Program/ Exit entry or exit ,return to primary menu
ENTER
entry into the menu interface ,confirm the setup parameters
increase (+)
Increase in the data or function code
decrease (-)
Decrease in the data or function code
48
OD9L User Manual
Operation and Display
RUN STOP/RESET QUICK/JOG
shift key Run key STOP/RESET direction/jog run
Select the displayed parameters in turn on the stop display interface and running display interface, the specific content please refer to A7-29 and A7-31; when modifying parameters, select the modification digit of parameters
used in running operation under keyboard control mode
In the status of running, pressing it can stop the running operation; in fault alarm status, it can be used as reset. The characteristic of this key is limited by function code A7-02 When A7-28 is set as 0, it's used as jog run key. When A7-28 is set as 1, it's used as direction key, press this key now, the direction will be reversed.
4.2 Organization Way of the Inverter Function Code
The meaning of the function code group of OD9L as follows:
Function code group
Function description
Explanation
A0AF C0C3 E0E6 F0FF U0U1
Basic function parameter group 2nd motor parameter group Enhancement function parameter group Professional inverter function selection group
Monitoring parameter group
Refer to mainstream inverter manufacturers function code planning. 2nd motor parameter, acceleration and deceleration time, control method, all can be set independently. System parameter set, custom-made user function code, optimization control, AI/AO revising, master-slave control, mechanical brake function and sleep function.
Choose to use different professional inverter function
U0 is the fault record parameter group; U1 is the user monitoring parameter group, for the convenience to check the relevant output status.
49
Operation and Display
OD9L User Manual
4.3 Instruction of Function Code Viewing and Modification Methods
Function code parameter of OD9L inverter adopts three-level menu, it can view and monitor the parameter by operation panel. The three-level menu includes function parameter set (level 1 menu) Function code (level 2 menu) Function code setup value (level 3 menu). Refer to Fig.4-2 for the operation procedure. In the state parameter interface, it can check the different status parameter by the "" key.
I Level menu (Choose function code group number )
State parameter interface (default screen)
When pressing ascending key (+), followed by recycling; When pressing descending key (-), reverse order recycling. WhenC0-00=1, group C1~C3 are invisible;
When C0-00=2, group C1~C3 are visible.
50.00 PRG
A0
switch
AF
C0
C3
E0
E6
PRG return
ENTER
Level II menu choose function code
serial number
When pressing ascending key (+), function code serial number substract 1;
A0-00 When pressing descending key (-), function code serial number plus 1.
A0-06
ENTER PRG return
0
5
Use key (+)/(-) to modify
Level III menu set function code value
A0-07
ENTER
The next function code serial number
U0
U1
Fig.4-2 three-level menu operation flow chart
Tips: When operating with the three-level menu, you can press PRG or ENTER to return to the 2nd level menu. But it will save the present parameter data and move to the next function code if press ENTER, while it will give up the present parameter revising if press PRG.
For example: make function code A2-04 change from 0.00Hz to 5.00Hz.
PRG
50.00
Key (+)
ENTER
Key (+)
A0
A2
A2-00
A2-04
PRG
A2
PRG
ENTER
A2-04
Key (+)
05.00
00.00
SHIFT
ENTER
00.00
Fig.4-3 parameter setting operation flowchart In the status of the 3rd menu, the value can't be modified if the parameter doesn't have the flashing digit. You can check the function code property description for the specific reasons.
50
OD9L User Manual
Operation and Display
4.4 Function Code Menu Mode and Switch Description
4.4.1 The definition and operation of multi-function shortcuts
The function of Quick/Jog can be defined by function code A7-28.
Quick/Jog function selection
Default value 0
0 Forward jog
A7-28
Seting range
1 Switch between forward and reverse 2 Reverse jog
Switch between panel control and remote control 3 (terminal or communication)
Quick/Jog is a multi-function key; it can set the function by this function code. It can switch
both in stop and running status.
0: Forward jog
Achieve the forward jog function by the Quick/Jog key.
1: Switch between forward and reverse
Switch the frequency command direction by the Quick/Jog key, but it's effective only the
instruction source in panel command channel.
2: Reverse jog
Achieve the reverse jog function by the Quick/Jog key.
3: Switch between panel control and remote control (terminal or communication)
Switch between present instruction source and keyboard control (local operation). It's
ineffective if the present instruction source is keyboard control.
4.4.2 Function menu mode
For the convenience to check and operate, OD9L series of inverter provide three kinds of menu mode of function code to switch.
Menu mode
Description
-BASE Basic menu mode
Display the function code parameter in sequenceA0AFC0C3 E0E6F0FFU0U1, of which C1C3 only displayed in the 2nd motor. Display of F1FF is relevant to the parameter setting of F0-00,
not displayed by default.
Only display the customized function parameter (31 parameters at
-USER Customized mode
most). It can set freely by the group E1. Function code start with "U" and can modify the function code parameter value directly. parameter It has defined 19 function codes which are frequently used before the delivery. Meanwhile, user can clear the custom-made function by
E1-00, then redefineE1-01~E1-31.
-NOTF
When enter this mode, it only display the function codes which are
Default value modify different from the default parameter. The function codes are start
parameter mode
with "N".
51
Operation and Display
OD9L User Manual
Tab.4-1 Group E1 default customized function code
Function code
E1-00
Default value
0
Name
Clear the custom-made function
E1-01 uA0-03 Control method
Function code E1-10
E1-11
E1-02 uA0-04 Instruction source
E1-12
E1-03
Main frequency uA0-06
source X selection
E1-13
E1-04 uA0-23 Accelerating time 1 E1-14
E1-05 E1-06 E1-07 E1-08 E1-09
uA0-24 Decelerating time 1
uA1-00 uA1-01 uA1-02 uA1-04
Tuning selection of motor 1 Rated power of motor 1 Rated voltage of motor 1 Rated current of motor 1
E1-15 E1-16 E1-17 E1-18 E1-19
Default value
Name
Rated frequency of uA1-05
motor 1
uA1-06 uA1-12
uA1-13 uA5-00 uA5-01 uA5-02 uA6-00
Rated rotation speed of motor 1
Acceleration while in the dynamically complete tuning Deceleration while in the dynamically complete tuning Function selection of terminal DI1 Function selection of terminal DI2 Function selection of terminal DI3 Output selection of relay 1
uA6-01 Output selection of relay 2
uA6-02 Output selection of Y1
4.4.3 Switch of function menu mode
The inverter is in "-BASE" basic menu mode in default. If it's needed to switch the menu mode(set E0-03=1), pressing "ENTER" for 3s on the state parameter interface. When it's done it displays the present menu mode (-BASE\-USEr\-NOTF) for 3s, then back to the state parameter interface. You can check and set the function code in present menu mode. The detail flowchart is as below.
52
OD9L User Manual
Operation and Display
50.00
ENTER 3s
-BASE
50 .00 PRG
A0
ENTER 3 s
-USEr
50 .00 PRG
ENTER 3 s
uA0 -03
-NOTF
50.00 PRG
nA0-03
ENTER 3s
Fig.4-4 operation diagram of the menu mode switch
4.5 Preparation before Running
4.5.1 Customized function code setting
The customized menu has been saved in 19 frequently used parameters in default, showed as tab.4-1. The user can clear the customized function code by E1-00=1, and redefine function code by E1-00~E1-31. The switching among menu modes as described in section 4.4.3.
4.5.2 Procedures before running
The flowchart in this chapter has tell us the basic procedures before start the inverter, please choose the corresponding flowchart according to the accrual application. We only introduce the basic settings in this section.
Flow chart Sub flowchart
Content
page
A
-
Basic steps from installation, wiring to running
53
Running under open-loop vector (speed
-
A-1
sensor less vector) control
54
-
A-2
Running under V/F control
55
Flowchart A (connecting to the motor by the least setting change) Flowchart A explains the connection to the motor by the least setting. The setting will have some differences for the different use. Please use the initial set parameter of the inverter in the application which doesn't need precise control. Sub flowchart A-1 (motor running with open-loop vector control mode) Sub flowchart A-1 explains the startup steps in open-loop vector control mode. It's more effective for vector control when high starting torque, torque limitation etc are needed. Sub flowchart A-2 (simple motor running with V/F control mode ) When running with V/F control mode, please set the parameter according to below flowchart.
53
Operation and Display
It is more effective of V/F control in fan or pump application.
start
Install the inverter according to the manual and wiring Obey the safety rules, power on
Please set F0-03 (control mode selection)
OD9L User Manual
Set the nameplate parameter
When C0-00=1:
When C0-00=2:
A1-01: Rated power of motor 1 C1-01: Rated power of motor 2
A1-02: Rated voltage of motor 1 C1-02: Rated voltage of motor 2
A1-03: poles of motor 1
C1-03: poles of motor 2
A1-04: Rated current of motor 1 C1-04: Rated current of motor 2
A1-05: Rated frequency of motor 1 C1-05: Rated frequency of motor 2
A1-06: Rated speed of motor 1 C1-06: Rated speed of motor 1
Control mode selection A0-03=
1: open-loop vector 2 (speed sensor less vector) To sub
flowchart A-1
2: VF control To sub
flowchart A-2
Do the best adjustment, set some parameter (A0-04: run the instruction source, A0-06: main frequency
source selection,A0-10: frequency source selection)
Confirm the parameter by check function, save it if it's right
So far, the preparation before running is finished
Figure 4-5 basic steps before running
54
OD9L User Manual
From flowchart
A
Operation and Display
If self-learning disconnect the load for
the motor?
NO
NO
YES
If the motor load is
under the rated 30%?
YES
If it has marked the suitable data for motor
in the test report?
YES
Set the motor parameter manually
Static tuning
NO
A1-00=1
Rotary tuning (A1-00=2)
No-load test run Confirm if it's normal of the running, rotation direction, multifunction input/output etc
Connect the motor to the load
Run the actual load Confirm if the mechanical system run normally
To flowchart
A
Fig.4-6 open-loop vector control running steps
55
Operation and Display
From flowchart
A
OD9L User Manual
Confirm if the selected V/F curve (A3-00) is appropriate Confirm if the nameplate parameter is right
No-load test running Confirm if the running, rotation direction, multifunction
input/output etc is normal
Run the actual load Confirm if the mechanical system is working normally
To flowchart
A
Fig.4-7 V/F control mode running steps
4.5.3 State parameter check
It can display various of state parameter through the key "" either the machine is stopped or running. It's function code A7-29 (running parameter) and A7-30 (stop parameter) choose the parameter display when it's stop or running according to the binary bit. It has totally sixteen run/stop state parameter for choosing to display, more details please refer to the A7-29 and A7-30 description in chapter five.
4.6 Start-stop Control of the Inverter
4.6.1 Source selection of the start-stop signal
There are three source of the start-stop control command of the inverter, respectively are
operate panel control, terminal control and communication control, you can choose it by function
code A0-04.
Set running command source
Default value
explanation
A0-04
Setting range
Operate panel command
0
Press RUN, STOP to start-stop
channel (LED off)
1
Terminal command channel (LED on)
Define DI as the start-stop command terminal
Communication command
1
Use MODBUS-RTU protocol
channel (LED flicker)
56
OD9L User Manual
Operation and Display
4.6.1.1 Operate panel start-stop control When operate the panel to make the function code A0-4=0, it's panel star-stop control mode.
Press the "Run" button then the inverter starts to run (LED on); press "STOP" button on the run status, then the inverter stops (LED off). 4.6.1.2 Terminal start-stop control
Terminal start-stop control is suited to use toggle switch or electromagnetic switch as start-stop occasions for the apply system, it also suited to this kind of electrical design which the controller use dry contact signal to control the inverter.
OD9L series of inverter provides various of terminal control ways, it can use function code A5-11 to confirm what control way does the terminal uses. Function code A5-00~A5-04 determine the input port of the start-stop control signal. For the specific setting ways, please refer to the detail explanation of function code A5-11, A5-00~A5-04 etc.
Example 1: It's require to use toggle switch as the start-stop switch of the inverter, connect the forward running switch signal to DI2 port, connect the reverse running switch signal to DI4 port. The way how to use and set is as follows:
Port Function code Set value Command mode Select command source
SW1 SW2
RUN/ forward
RUN/ revers e
X1
X2 X3
X4 X5 . COM
A5-00 A5-01 A5-02 A5-03 A5-04
.
.
1 FWD 2 REV A5-11=0 .
Run command A0-04=1
Terminal command
.
Two wire mode 1
Fig.4-8 Illustration of terminal control start-stop mode
The control mode showed in the picture above: when SW1 is closed, the inverter runs in forward; when SW1 is open, the inverter is stopped. Similarly, when SW2 is closed, the inverter runs in reverse; when SW2 is open, the inverter is stopped. Whatever both SW1 and AW2 are closed or open, the inverter will be stopped.
Example 2: It's require to use electromagnetic pushbutton switch as the start-stop switch of the inverter, connect the start signal to DI2 port, connect the stop signal to DI4 port. The way how to use and set is as follows:
Port Function code Set value Command mode Select command source
RUN/
X1
A5-00
.
SB 2 SB 1
forward
X2
A5-01
St op RUN/
X3
A5-02
FWD 1
2
REV St op
A5-11=2
Run command A0-04=1
SB 3
revers e
X4
A5-03
3
Terminal command
X5
A5-04
.
Three wire mode 1
.
.
COM
57
Operation and Display
OD9L User Manual
Fig.4-8 Illustration of terminal control start-stop mode
The control mode showed in the picture above: SB1 must keep closed on the normal running, otherwise the inverter will be stopped. The commands of SB2 and SB3 are effective when the buttons are pressed down. The running status of the inverter is determined by the final actions of these 3 buttons. 4.6.1.3 communication start-stop control
The upper computer uses RS485 communication mode to control the inverter application. Choosing communication mode (A0-04=2) as control command source, then the start-stop of the inverter can be controlled by communication mode. The setting of the related function code is as follows:
Port
485+ 485-
Upper computer
RS485
Communication setting is consistent with the upper computer's
A8-00: communication velocity A8-01: verify A8-02: address A8-03: respond delay A8-04: overtime communication A8-05: transmission format
Select command source as communication mode
A0-04=2 Run command
Fig.4-10 Illustration of communication control start-stop mode
In the above picture, if set communication overtime (A8-04) function code as nonzero value, the automotive stop function of the inverter overtime fault is active. It can avoid the inverter run out of control because of the communication fault or upper computer fault. This function can be use in some certain application.
The protocol which built in the communication port is MODBUS-RTU slave protocol, the upper machine must use MODBUS-RTU master protocol to communicate with it. For the related specific content of the communication protocol, please refer to the manual appendix A: OD9L Modbus communication protocol.
4.6.2 Start mode
There is 3 modes of the inverter, respectively are direct start, fast track start and asynchronous machine pre-excited magnetic start, it can be selected by function parameter A2-00.
When A2-00=0, it's the direct start mode which apply to the majority small inertia load. The frequency curve of the start procedure is as below picture. The "DC brake" function before start is suitable to the elevator and lifting load; "Start frequency" is suitable to the equipment drive which need start torque impact. For example the cement mixer equipment.
When A2-00=2, it's only suitable to asynchronous inductive motor load. Using pre-excited magnetism before start can improve the fast response feature of the asynchronous motor, and meet the application demand which requires short acceleration time. The frequency cure on the start procedure is as follows.
58
OD9L User Manual
Operation and Display
f Frequency
A2-00=0: direct start
Upper limiting frequency
A0-16
f Frequency
A2-00=0: direct start
Upper limiting frequency
A0-16
Retention
time of start
frequency
DC A2-05 brake
time A2-07
A2-04
Start frequency
A0-23 Acceleration time
Running command
t Time
A2-04=0.00Hz A2-05=0.0S A2-07=0.0S
Running command
A0-23 Acceleration time
t Time
f Frequency A2-00=2: magnetic pre-excite start
Fig.4-11 Direct start illustration
Upper limiting frequency
A0-16
f Frequency
A2-00=2: magnetic pre-excite start
Upper limiting frequency
A0-16
Retention time of start frequency
Pre-excite A2-05
A0-23 Acceleration time
A2-04=0.00Hz A2-05=0.0S A2-07=0.0S
Pre-excite
A0-23 Acceleration time
magnetism
time
Start A2-04 frequency
magnetism time
t
t
Running command
Time
Running command
Time
Fig.4-12 Pre-excited magnetism start illustration
4.6.3 Stop mode
There are 2 kinds of stop mode of inverter, respectively are deceleration stop and free stop. It can be selected by function code A2-13.
Frequency
f
Running
A2-13=0:
frequency deceleration stop
Frequency
f
Running
frequency
A2-13=1: free stop
A0-24 Deceleration time
A2-14 Initiate frequency of DC brake stop
Stop command
A2-17 DC brake time of stop
t Time
Stop command
Fig.4-13 Stop illustration
t Time
59
Operation and Display
OD9L User Manual
4.6.4 Jog running
In many occasions, the inverter need to run in slow speed so as to test the equipment or other function, so it's convenient to run in jog.
Output frequency
Reference frequency of acceleration/deceleration
A0-11
Jog frequency A7-00
Actual acceleration time Jog acceleration Time A7-01
Set the acceleration time
Jog command
Time t
Jog deceleration time A7-02
Actual deceleration time Set the deceleration time
Fig.4-14 Illustration of Jog running 4.6.4.1 Setting the parameter and operating of the Jog by operation panel
Jog command button
(stop status)
JOG
Panel command way
A7-28=0 A7-28=2
A0-04=0
Jog running parameter
A7-00 Jog frequency A7-01 Acceleration time A7-02 Deceleration time
FWD JOG REV JOG
Fig.4-15 Illustration of jog parameter setting After setting the related function code parameter as above picture, on the status of stop, pressing the JOG button, then the inverter starts to run in forward. when releasing the JOG button, the inverter decelerates to stop.
4.6.4.2 Setting the parameter and operating of the Jog by DI port. In some production devices which need to use jog frequently, such as textile machine, it will
be more convenient to use keys or buttons to control the jog. The related function code setting pls refer to below picture:
60
OD9L User Manual
Operation and Display
Port Function code Set value
Setting parameter of jog
terminal command mode
Jog control buttons
X1
(Stop status)
X2
FJ OG RJOG
Jog/FWD Jog/R EV
X3
X4 X5 . COM
A5-00 A5-01 A5-02 A5-03 A5-04
.
.
.
. 4 FWD JOG
REV JOG 5
A7-00 Jog frequency A7-01 Acceleration time A7-02 Deceleration time
A0-04=1
Run in FWD jog Run in REV jog
Fig.4-16 Parameter setting illustration of DI mode jog
After setting the related function code parameter as above picture, on the status of stop, pressing the FJOG button, then the inverter starts to run in forward. when releasing the FJOG button, the inverter decelerates to stop. Similarly, pressing the RJOG button can operate on the inverter in reverse jog.
4.7 Running Frequency Control of the Inverter
The inverter has been set with 2 frequency preset channel, respectively named main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y. They can work in single channel or switch at any time, even superimpose according to certain calculation method so as to meet the demand of different application occasions.
4.7.1 Select the main frequency source given
There are 9 kinds of main frequency source; they respectively are digital preset (UP/DN no memory after power-off), digital preset (memory after power-off), AI1, AI2, PULSE input, multi-segment command, simple PLC, PID, communication given etc. You can select the certain one by setting A0-06.
DI1~ DI5
A0-11
? ?
Digital setting 0
Holding on
1
AI
power-off
0~10V
2
Analog quantity
A2
3
0~10V
Analog quantity
A5-00 ~ A5-04
AC-00 ~ AC-15
4
=12/13/14/15
Each frequency band
Group AC function code Simple PLC control 5
The upper ma chi ne
AI DI5(f)
Group AA function code PID
6
A8-00~A8-05 Define communication
configuration
Communication given 7 Register H1000
HDI7 A5-06=30
Pul se frequency
A5-30
8
~A5-34
A0-06 Main frequency source X selection
A0-11
Main frequency source X
Frequency switch
A5-00~A5-06 =39
DI1~ HDI7
Fig.4-17 Illustration of main frequency source setting From the different frequency source in the picture we can see that the running frequency of
61
Operation and Display
OD9L User Manual
the inverter can be determined by function code, or by immediate manual adjustment, or by analog quantity, or by multi-speed terminal command, or by built-in PID controller to regulate closely through external feedback signal, and also can be determined by communication from upper machine.
For every kinds of frequency source giving setting, the related function codes have been listed in the above picture, you can refer to the details of each function code when setting.
4.7.2 Usage of given with auxiliary frequency
The auxiliary frequency source Y comes in the same way as the main frequency source, and it's selected by A0-07.
DI1~ DI5
A0-11
? ?
Digital setting 0
Holding on
1
AI
power-off
0~10V Analog quantity 2
A2
0~10V Analog quantity 3
A5-00 ~ A5-04
AC-00 ~ AC-15
4
=12/13/14/15
Each frequency band
Group AC function code Simple PLC control 5
The upper ma chi ne
AI DI5(f)
Group AA function code PID
6
A8-00~A8-05 Define communication
Communication given 7 Register H1000
configuration
DI7
F5-06=30
Pul se frequency
A5-30
8
~A5-34
A0-07 Main frequency source Y selection
Main frequency source Y
A0-11
Frequency switch F5-00~F5-06
=40
DI1~ DI7
Fig.4-18 Illustration of auxiliary frequency source setting In the actual operation, it's A0-10 that set the relationship between the target frequency and the main/auxiliary frequency source.
4.7.3 Frequency closed loop control of the process control
There is built-in PID adjuster in OD9L, and it coordinate with how to choose the frequency given channel. Through it users can realize the automatic adjustment of the process control, for example constant temperature, constant pressure and tension etc application.
62
OD9L User Manual
Operation and Display
Set a goal
AA-21
PID1:
AA-22
AA-01 PID digital giving
AA-04 PID logic 0:positive
1:negative %
AA-00 PID given
AA-10
%
Given
source
selection
+-
+-
Deviation amplitude
limiting
Proportion Kp1:AA-06 Integral Ti1:AA-07 Differential Td1:AA-08
PID2: Proportion Kp2:AA-18
AA-23 Switch conditon
PID output frequency
A0-10=0
AA-26 AA-27
PID output chatacter
A0-06=6 Frequency
source selection
PWM drive
Motor execute
Object
Integral
AA-05 Feedback
range
U1-10 Given quantity display
U1-10 Given quantity display
Ti1:AA-19 Differential
Td1:AA-20
AA-12 Feedback filter time
AA-03 Feedback
source
AE-00 AE-15
Calibration curve
Physical
Electrical
quantity
A1 % parameter
signal Transmitter
character
detect
preprocess
Fig.4-19 Illustration of frequency closed loop control
4.7.4 Swing frequency mode setting
In textile and chemical fiber process equipments, it can improve the uniformity of the winding spindle with swing frequency function like below picture by setting function code Ab-00~Ab-04, for more details please refer to the relevant function code description.
Running with swing frequency Ab-01>0% Ab-02: jump range Ab-03:frequency cycle Ab-04:rise time
Swing bar motor
With swing frequency
Reciprocating device
Without swing frequency
Fig.4-20 Illustration of swing frequency application setting
4.7.5 Multi-speed mode setting
For those application occasions where they don' t need continuous adjustment of the running frequency and just need some certain frequency value, multi-speed control is suitable. OD9L can be set with at most 16 segments of running frequency, and select by 4 DI input signal combinations. Set the function codes of the DI port as function value 12~15, then the multi frequency commands input ports have been defined. The required multi frequency will be set by the multi frequency form of group AC, and set the "frequency source selection" as multi frequency giving like below picture:
63
Operation and Display
Port Function code
X1 A5-00
0
X2 A5-01
0
X3 A5-02
1
X4 A5-03
0
X5 A5-04
OD9L User Manual
(Binary)
Mult ista ge
Set value State combination frequency form %
0 0 0 0
AC-00
.
0 0 0 1
AC-01
.
0 0 1 0
AC-02
.
. .
. .
.
1 1 1 0
AC-14
.
1 1 1 1
AC-15
A0-10=0
15
14
A0-06=4
13
Frequency source
12
selection
..
Fig.4-21 Illustration of multi-speed control mode
In the above picture, X2, X3, X4 and X5 are selected as signal input ports of the multi frequency, and successively compose 4 bytes of binary number, then combined to certain value according to the status, and select multi frequency at this time. When (X5, X4, X3, X2) = (0,0,1,0), the status combination number is 2, so it will pick the frequency value of function code AC-02 as target running frequency.
OD9L can set at most 4 DI ports as input ports of multi frequency command, and also allow less than 4 DI ports to give multi frequency. For the lacking digits, generally regard it as status 0.
4.7.6 Motor running direction setting
When press the button "RUN" after the inverter recovers to default parameter, the
running direction of the drive is called forward. If the present rotating direction is opposite to the required direction, please set A0-13=1 or exchange any 2 wiring of the UVW output lines after cut off the electricity ( Pay attention to wait the main capacitor of the inverter fully discharged) so as to exclude the direction problem.
In all the drive system, if only allow the system to run in forward direction but no reverse direction, it's necessary to set A0-13=2. If there is reverse command at the moment, the inverter will decelerate to stop, and the FWD/REV light on the panel will flicker all the time. The logic relationship is like the picture below:
64
OD9L User Manual
Operation and Display
Frequency command
Running command (panel) Running forward
Fs > 0
command
(terminal communication)
Fs = 0
Set the direction
0 1 2
Reverse running command (terminal communication)
Fs = 0
Fs > 0
A0-13
0 1 2
Running forward Running reverse
Decelerate stop
Fig.4-22 Illustration of motor running direction
For the application which is not allowed to have reverse rotation, please don't modify the function code to change the running direction. Because when it restore to default, the function code mentioned above will also be reset. Thus the function can be realized by the NO.50 function of the digital input terminal DI.
4.7.7 Fixed-length control mode
OD9L has fixed-length control function. When the length pulse gets through DI (Choose 30 of DI function) terminal acquisition, make the pulse quantity of terminal sampling divide pulse quantity per meter (Ab-07), the calculated result is the actual length Ab-06. When the actual length is greater than the set length Ab-05, the multi-function digital switching value output "length reached" ON signal.
During the fixed-length process, it can reset the length (Choose 31 of DI function) through DI terminals. You can refer to below picture to set the device.
Length pulse
A5-04=30 (pulse length input)
?
Terminal HDI7
Ab-07 (pulse quantity setting of unit
length)
Length reset
A5-00~A5-04=31 (length reset)
Ab-05 (length setting)
Ab-06 (length reading)
Zero clearing
Set 1 of digital
output port after
length arrival
A6-00~A6-02=20
=
(length arrrival)
Reset
Length pulse input 1 2 3
Length reset input
Length arrival output
10 11 12
Ab-05=11 Ab-06=11
1 2 U1-13=0 Ab-06=0
Fig.4-23 Function code setting of fixed-length control mode 65
Operation and Display
OD9L User Manual
Attention: 1) It can't recognize the direction on the fixed-length control mode, so the length is calculated according to the pulse quantity. 2) It can only use HDI as the "length count input" terminal. 3) It can make it an automotive stop system to feed the length reached switching value output signal back to the stop input terminals of the inverter.
Run button Stop button
Jog button Length zero clearing
button Length pulse input
Length arrival output
OD9L
CME COM Ab-05= set length
X1 A0-04=1A5-00=1 X2 A5-01=3A5-02=4 X3 X4 A5-03=31A5-04=30
Ab-07= pulse quantity of HDI unit length
DO1 A6-02=20
Length detecting sensor
M
Rolling motor
Fig. 4-24 Examples of fixed-length control function
66
OD9L User Manual
Operation and Display
4.7.8 Usage of count function of the inverter
Count value is collected by DI (Choose 28 of DI function) terminal. When the count value reaches the set count value Ab-08, multi-function digital switching value output "set count value reached" ON signal, then the counter stops counting.
When the count value reaches the set count value Ab-09, multi-function digital switching value output "specified count value reached" ON signal, the counter continue to counting at the moment until "set the count value" signal.
Count pulse
A5-00~A5-04=28 (count pulse input)
Counter reset
A5-00~A5-04=29 (counter reset)
Ab-09 (specified count)
U1-12 (count value)
Zero clearing
=
Ab-08 (set counting)
A6-00~A6-02=30 (specified count
arrive)
Reset
=
A6-00~A6-02=29 (set counting arrive)
Set 1 for digital port after specified
count arrived
Set 1 for digital port after set
counting arrived
Count pulse input 1 2 3
Count reset input
Specified count arrival output
Set counting arrival output
10 11 12
Ab-09=11 U1-12=11
19 20 21
U1-12=0
1 2
Ab-08=20 U1-12=20
Fig.4-25 Counting mode function code setting
Attention:
1) Specified count value Ab-09 shouldn't be greater than set count value Ab-08. 2) It must use DI5 port when the pulse frequency is high. 3) The switch ports of "Set counting value reached" and "specified counting reached" can't be
re-used. 4) On the status of RUN/STOP of the inverter, the counter will keep counting until the "set the
count value" signal. 5) The count value can hold still on power-off. 6) It can make it an automotive stop system to feed the counting reached switching value output
signal back to the stop input terminals of the inverter.
4.8 Motor Characteristic Parameter Setting and Automotive Tuning
4.8.1 Motor parameter that need setting
When the inverter is running with "vector control mode" (A0-03=1), it strongly dependent to precise motor parameter, thus this is one of the most important distinctions compared with "VF control" (A0-03) mode. The inverter must get the precise parameters from the controlled motor for the purpose to have good driving performance and running efficiency.
67
Operation and Display
OD9L User Manual
The required parameters are as below (function code of default motor 1):
Parameter of motor 1 A1-01~A1-06 A1-07~A1-11
Parameter description Rated power/ voltage/ current/ frequency/ revolving speed The internal equivalent stator resistance/ inductive reactance/ rotor inductance
mark Machine type parameter, manual input
Tuning parameter
4.8.2 Automatic tuning and identification of motor parameters
The way for inverter to get the internal electrical parameters of the controlled motor include: dynamic identification, static identification, manual input the parameters and so on.
Identification methods Dynamic identification without load Dynamic identification with load
Static identification
Input parameters
Adapted conditions Synchronous motor and asynchronous motor: occasions where it's convenient for motor to separate from the application system. Synchronous motor and asynchronous motor: occasions where it's inconvenient for motor to separate from the application system. Only for asynchronous motor: occasions where it's difficult for motor to separate from the load and dynamic identification is prohibited. Only for asynchronous motor: occasions where it's inconvenient for motor to separate from the application system. Copy the parameter from the motor which is the same type as the target motor and has been identified by the inverter, then input it to the function code A1-01~A1-11.
Effect Best Good Worse
Good
The automatic tuning process of the motor parameters is as below: Below we take the default motor 1 as example to explain the parameter identification methods, and it's in the same way as motor 2. Step 1: if the motor can be separate from the load, take the motor away from the load part on power-off condition, and let the motor run freely on empty load. Step 2: After power-on, make the command source (A0-04) of the inverter as the command channel of the operation panel. Step 3: Input the parameters according to the nameplate (A1-01~A1-06), then input the actual parameters according to below table (Choosing according to the present motor):
Motor selection Motor 1
Motor 2
Parameters A1-01: The rated power A1-02: The rated voltage A1-04: The rated current A1-05: The rated frequency A1-06: The rated revolving speed C1-01~C1-06: Same definition as above codes
68
OD9L User Manual
Operation and Display
Step 4: if it's asynchronous motor, please choose 2 (Completely dynamic tuning) of A1-00 (Tuning choice, using C1-00 for motor 2), then press button ENTER, then the keyboard displays as below:
Then press button RUN, the inverter will drive the motor to accelerate/decelerate, forward/reverse run, and to turn on the indicator light. The whole identification will keep running for about 2 minutes. The tuning is finished when the above signals disappear and back to normal display status. The inverter will figure out below parameters of the motor after the tuning.
Motor selection Motor 1
Motor 2
Parameters A1-07: No-load current of motor 1 A1-08: Stator current of motor 1 A1-09: Rotor resistance of motor 1 A1-10: interaction inductive reactance A1-11: leakage inductive reactance of motor 1 C1-07~C1-11: same definition as above
If the motor can't completely separate from the load, please choose 1 (static tuning) of A1-00 (using C1-00 for motor 2), then press RUN button on the panel, so the parameter identification starts.
4.8.3 Setting and switching of multi-group motor parameters
It can be assigned by function code C0-00 or digital input terminal function 41 to choose present valid parameter groups. But it has privilege when digital input terminal function 41 is effective, so C0-00 setting is invalid.
C0-00 =1 Motor 1
C0-00 =2 Motor 2
It can drive multi motors at the same time on VF control mode.
It can't drive multi motors at the same time on
vector control mode.
It can drive at most 2 motors in different time on vector control mode, and the parameters will be
stored separately.
Fig.4-26 Switching of multi-group motors
4.9 Usage of Inverter DI Ports
The control board comes with 7 DI ports, numbering as DI1~DI7. The internal hardware of DI port has 24Vdc power source for testing use, so users just need to short connect the DI port and the COM port, the DI signal can be put into the inverter.
On the default status, A5-13=00000, it's valid signal (logic 1) with DI port short connected. The DI is invalid (logic 0) signal when DI port is hanging. Users can also change the valid mode:
69
Operation and Display
OD9L User Manual
The signal is invalid when the DI ports are short connected (logic 0) while the signal is valid (logic 1)when the DI ports are hanging. It needed to modify the place which is corresponding to A5-13 to 1. The two function code corresponds to the valid setting of DI1~DI7.
The inverter has set software filter time (A5-10) for the input signal of DI port for the purpose to improve the anti-interference ability. For DI1~DI 3 input terminals, it has specially provide signal delay function for some application in need.
T
T
Hardware Inside DI DI signal signal
Fig.4-27 DI delay setting The above-mentioned function of 7 DI ports can be defined in A5-00~A5-06 function code. Each DI can be selected from 53 functions according to the demand. For the design of hardware characteristic, only HDI can accept high frequency pulse signal. So for the application that need high speed counting, please arrange it to HDI port.
4.10 Usage of Inverter DO Ports
The control board comes with 3 lines of digital output, respectively are control board RELAY 1, RELAY 2 and Y1, of which Y1 is transistor type output and can drive 24Vdc low voltage signal loop; relay output can drive 50 V ac control loop.
It can define each digital output function by setting the value of parameter A6-00 ~ A6-02. It can indicate every kinds of working status or warning signals of the inverter, totally about 45 function setting, with which can meet the demand of users for certain automatic control requirements. For the specific setting value please refer to detail description of group A6 function code.
4.11 AI Input Signal Character and Pretreatment
The inverter can support 2 lines of AI source.
Ports
Input signal characteristics
AI1-GND
Can receive 0~10Vdc signal
AI2-GND
When the dial switch "AI2 I-U" is in "U" mark position, it can receive
0~10Vdc signal; when the dial switch "AI2 I-U" is in "I" mark position, it
can receive 0~20mA current signal.
AI can be used when the inverter uses external voltage current signal as frequency source
given, torque given, voltage given when VF separates, PID given or feedback.
The sampling value of AI port can be read in function code U1-08 and U1-09, the calculated
value can be provided for internal later calculations, so users can't read it directly.
70
OD9L User Manual
Operation and Display
The user can pre-set D%
D%
at most 3 kinds of
convert curve of the
input value, and
different AI channel
can use one same
Vi
Vi
curve.
Curve 0:A5-15A5-19
Curve 1:AE-00AE-07
D% Vi
Curve 2:AE-08AE-15
AI1 V AI2 V
U1-08 U1-09
Units digit:AI1 Curve selection02
Units digit:AI2 Curve selection02
%
AI1 internal
calculated value
%
AI2 internal
calculated value
Port
Sampling value
F5-43:AI multipoint curcve
Fig.4-28 The actual given of AI signal
4.12 Usage of Inverter AO port
The inverter totally support 2 lines of AO output.
Ports
Input signal characteristics
When the dial switch "AO1 I-U" is in "U" mark position, it can receive
AO1-GND
0~10Vdc signal; when the dial switch "AO1 I-U" is in "I" mark position, it can receive
0~20mA current signal;
When the dial switch "AO2 I-U" is in "U" mark position, it can receive
AO2-GND
0~10Vdc signal; when the dial switch "AO2 I-U" is in "I" mark position, it can receive
0~20mA current signal;
AO1 and AO2 can be used in analog to indicate the internal running parameters. The
indicated parameter attribute can be chosen by function code A6-09 and A6-10.
Before the indicated parameter output, it can also be revised as showed in below picture the
oblique line. For the details of function code A6-13~A6-16 please refer to chapter 5.
Time input
Time output
A7-40
A7-41
A7-40
Fig.4-29 AO output illustration
71
A7-41
Operation and Display
OD9L User Manual
4.13 Usage of Inverter Serial Communication
For hardware communication parameter configuration of communication ports please refer to group A8 function. It's the premise of normal communication to set the communication velocity and data format in accordance with the upper computer.
The serial ports of OD9L have built in MODBUS-RTU slave communication protocol, so the upper computer can check or revise function code, various of status parameters, send running command and running frequency to the inverter through the serial ports.
Upper computer
RS485
Port 485+ 485-
Communication setting is consistent with the upper computer's
A8-00: communication velocity MODBUS-RTU A8-01: verify Communication
protocol A8-02: address A8-03: respond delay A8-04: overtime communication A8-05: transmission format
Function code Status parameter Running command
Fig.4-30 communication setting illustration The function code, various of status parameters and command information in internal of OD9L are organized by "register parameter address", so the master machine can define the protocol of communication data interaction. For details please refer to appendix A: OD9L Modbus communication protocol.
4.14 Password Setting
The inverter provides password protection function. It's just the user password when setting A7-50 to nonzero status. The password protection is effective after it's back to state parameter interface. Pressing button PRG, it will display "-----", just showing the state parameter. If it's need to enter the normal menu to check and set the function code, you must press buttons on "-----" interface until it displays "00000"on the panel and then input the right password.
If you want to cancel the password protection function, you get through it with the right password, then set A7-50 to zero.
72
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
Chapter 5 Parameter Description
5.1 Group A0 Basic Function
A0-00 Product model
Range: 0.00655.35
Default: 53#.##
This parameter is provided only for the user to view the software version and cannot be
modified.
A0-01 G/P type display
Range: 01
Default: model dependent
This parameter is provided only for the user to view the model and cannot be modified
0: applied to the constant torque of the designated rated parameters(G type).
1: applied to the variable torque loads(fan and pump loads) of the designated rated parameters(P
type).
A0-02 Rated current
Range: 0.1A to 3000.0A Default: model dependent
This parameter is provided only for the user to view the rated current and cannot be modified.
A0-03 Control mode
Range: 12
1:open loop vector control (speed sensorless vector control)
2:V/F control
Default: 2
A0-04 Running command source selection Range:02
Default: 0
Select control command channel for inverter.
The inverter control command includes start , stop, forward rotation, reverse rotation and Jog.
0:operation panel command channel (LED OFF);
Perform running command control with key on the operation panel such as RUN,STOP/RES.
1:Terminal command channel (LED ON)
Perform running command control by the multifunctional input terminals, such as FWD, REV,
JOGF, JOGR etc.
2:Serial port command channel (LED flashes)
The running command is sent by the host computer via communication mode.
A0-05 Base frequency for modification during running Range:01 Default: 0 0: Running frequency. 1: Set frequency. This parameter is effective only when the frequency source is digital setting, and it's used to
confirm if the action of button Up/Down or terminal Up/Down is revising the setting frequency or running frequency. The biggest difference is reflected in the acceleration process.
A0-06 Main frequency source X selection Range:08
Default: 1
Select the input channel for main reference frequency of the inverter. There are 9 types of main
given frequency channels:
0:Up/Down modify frequency, non-record on stop.
73
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
The initial value is the value of A0-11 " Digital Setup Present Frequency". It can change the setup frequency value of the inverter through the key and on the keyboard
(or UP and DOWN of multifunction input terminals).Stop-recording on downtime means the
changed frequency value can't be recorded after the stop of the inverter. Then the setting
frequency value will recover to the value of A0-11 "Digital Setup Present Frequency".
1: Up/Down modify frequency, recording on power- off. The initial value is the value of A0-11 " Digital Setup Present Frequency". It can change the setup frequency value of the inverter through the key and on the keyboard (or UP and DOWN of multifunction input terminals). Recording on power-off means that the setting frequency upon restart of inverter remains the same as the value before power-off. 2AI1 3AI2 It means that the frequency is determined by the analog input terminal, OD9L Driver offers two analog input terminals, that is A11and A12, and A11 is the voltage input from 0V to 10V, the other is the current input from 4mA to 20mA. All of them can be selected by the dial switch on the control board. The corresponding relationship curves of the input voltage of AI1, AI2 and the target frequency can be selected by A5-45. OD9L provides 4 groups of relationship curves, of which 2 groups of them are straight lines (2 points correspondence) and the other 2 groups are arbitrary curves (2 points correspondence). Users can set them through function code A5-15~A5-24 and group AE function code. Function code A5-45 can be used to set these 2 analog input (AI1~AI2), respectively to choose one of the 4 groups of curves. When AI is as given frequency, voltage/ current input correspond to 100.0%, means the percentage of the maximum output frequency A0-14. 4. Multi speed Select multi speed running mode in need of setting Group A5 `Input Terminal and Group AC "Multi speed and PLC parameters" to determine the relative relationship between the reference signal and the reference frequency. 5.Simple PLC Select the simple PLC mode in need of setting to Group AC "MS speed and "PLC" parameter to determine the reference frequency when the frequency source is simple PLC , 6.PID Select the process PID control. In the meantime, it needs to set Group AA "PID Function" .The running frequency of the inverter is that after PID functions. Regarding PID reference source, reference quantity and feedback source, please check the Group AA "PID Function". 7.Communication reference It means that the main frequency source is given by the host computer via communication mode ( details refers to Appendix A OD9L MODBUS communication protocol). 8. Pulse frequency reference Pulse frequency reference is input by HDI port of the panel, and the pulse slope can be set by
74
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
A5-30~A5-34.
A0-07 Auxiliary frequency source Y selection Range:08
Default: 0
When the auxiliary frequency source is used as independent frequency reference channel, it is used in the same way as the main frequency source X
when the auxiliary frequency source is used as superposition reference (unit's digit of A0-10 is 1, 2, 3, 4), special points as follows:
1.When the auxiliary frequency source is the digital reference, the present frequency (A0-11) is ineffective. It can adjust the main reference frequency through the key and on the keyboard (or UP and DOWN of multifunction input terminals)
2.When the auxiliary frequency source is the analog input reference (A11, A12) 100% of input setup is relative to the auxiliary frequency source range (refer to A0-08-A0-09). In need to adjust the main reference frequency, please set the corresponding setup range of analog input to "-n% to +n%" (refer to A5-15 and A5-24).
Tips :there is difference between the auxiliary frequency source Y selection and the main frequency source X set up value, that is to say,the main and auxiliary frequency sources cannot use the same frequency reference channel.
A0-08 Range of auxiliary frequency Y selection Range:01
Default: 0
0: Relative to maximum frequency. 1: Relative to main frequency X. A0-08 is used to determine the relative object of the range, if it's relative to the maximum frequency (A0-14), the range is fixed value. If it's relative to main frequency source X, the range will change with the main frequency source X.
A0-09 Range of auxiliary frequency Y
Range:0%100%
Default: 100%
When the frequency source choose to use frequency superposition giving (setting refer to
A0-10), it's used to determine the adjusting range of the auxiliary frequency source.
Frequency source superposition A0-10 selection
Unit's digit:0~4 Ten's digit:0~3
Default: 0
This parameter is used to select the frequency giving channel. Frequency reference is realized
through combination of the main frequency source X and the auxiliary frequency source Y.
Unit's digit: Frequency source selection 0Main frequency source X.
Main frequency X is as the target frequency. 1X and Y operation result.
X and Y operation result is the target frequency, and the operation relations refers to the description of "ten's digit".
2Switchover between X and Y (by DI terminal).
When the multi-function input terminal function 18 (frequency switch) is invalid, the main frequency X is the target frequency.
75
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
When the multi-function input terminal function 18 (frequency switch) is valid, the auxiliary frequency Y is the target frequency.
3Switchover between X and "X and Y operation" (by DI terminal).
When the multi-function input terminal function 18 (frequency switch) is invalid, the main frequency X is the target frequency.
When the multi-function input terminal function 18 (frequency switch) is valid, the superposition result frequency X is the target frequency.
4Switchover between Y and "X and Y operation" (by DI terminal).
When the multi-function input terminal function 18 (frequency switch) is invalid, the main frequency X is the target frequency.
When the multi-function input terminal function 18 (frequency switch) is valid, the superposition result frequency Y is the target frequency.
Frequency source selection
Main frequency source X
Frequency source superposition selection
Superposition source switch selection
Target running frequency
A0-0 unit's digit X
Y A0-0 ten's digit +
Frequency giving
Auxiliary frequency source Y
A0-08 A0-09
Max
Amplitude limit
Min
XY Frequency switch
A5-00~A5-04 =18
DI1~DI5
Fig.5-1 Illustration of frequency source superposition
Ten's digit: frequency source operation relations 0Main frequency source X+ Auxiliary frequency source Y The sum of main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y is the target frequency, so it realizes the frequency superposition giving function. 1Main frequency source X- Auxiliary frequency source Y The difference of main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y is the target frequency. 2Max(X,Y) Use the maximum value between main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source
76
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
Y as the target frequency. 3Min(X,Y)
Use the minimum value between main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y as the target frequency.
A0-11 Preset frequency
Range:0.00Hz~A0-14 Default:50.00Hz
When the main frequency source is selected as "Digital setup" or "Terminal UP/DOWN", this
function code is the initial value of frequency digital setup of the inverter.
A0-13 Rotation direction selection
Range:0~2
Default:0
0: Same direction: same direction with the current running direction of the motor.
1: Reverse direction: opposite direction with the current running direction of the motor.
2: Reverse forbidden: the inverter will decelerate to stop when it comes with reverse
command.
Through modifying this function code, it can change the rotary direction of the motor
without changing any other parameters, and the function is equivalent to change the rotary
direction by adjusting any two lines of the motor (U, V, W).
Tips: After parameter initialization, the motor running direction will restore to the original
status, so this action shall be carefully performed in the application where the rotary direction of
the motor is not allowed to change after system debugging.
A0-14 Maximum output frequency Range: 50.00Hz~600.00Hz<1> Default: 50.00Hz <1> represent the frequency range when A0-20=2, and the range when A0-20=1 is
50.0Hz~1200.0 Hz.
A0-15 Frequency source upper limit
Range:0~4
Default:0
This function code is used to define the source of upper limiting frequency.
0: Set by A0-16
1: AI1: 100% input setting corresponding to A0-14.
2: AI2: 100% input setting corresponding to A0-14.
3: Communication setting: the host machine giving through communication (details refer to Appendix A OD9L MODBUS communication protocol).
4: Pulse setting: pulse giving slope can be set by A5-30~A5-34.
In order to avoid galloping caused by material broken, it's better to set upper limiting frequency by analog. When the inverter is running to the upper limiting frequency, torque control is invalid and it continue to running with upper limiting frequency.
A0-16 Frequency upper limit
Range: A0-18~ A0-14 Default: 50.00Hz
A0-17 Frequency upper limit offset
Range: 0.00Hz ~ A0-14 Default: 0.00Hz
When the frequency upper limit is analog value reference, this parameter is used as analog
value offset, its reference value is A0-14. The addition of offset frequency and analog setup value of
frequency upper limit are used as the final setup value of frequency upper limit.
77
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
A0-18 Frequency lower limit
Range: 0.00Hz ~ A0-16 Default: 0.00Hz
The inverter starts from the start frequency. If the giving frequency is lower than frequency
lower limit in the running process, the inverter will keep running under frequency lower limit until it
stops or the giving frequency is higher than the frequency lower limit.
A0-19 Command source binding select
Range: 000~ 888
Default: 000
It's convenient for frequency source switching with 3 kinds of defined running commands
and banding groups with 9 kinds of given frequency channels.
0: No Binding
1:Digital setting
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: Multi-speed
5: Simple PLC
6: PID
7: Communication setting
8: Pulse setting (HDI7)
Unit's digit: Binding operation keypad command to frequency source
Ten's digit: Binding operation terminal command to frequency source
Hundred's digit: Binding operation communication command to frequency source
Thousand's digit: Reserved
The meaning of above giving channels is same as main frequency X which choose A0-06. Please refer to A0-06 function description.
Different running command channels can bind the same frequency giving channels. When command source has bound frequency source, during the period that the command source is valid, frequency source set by A0-06~A0-10 will not work.
A0-20 Frequency fractional selection
Range: 1~ 2
Default: 2
This parameter is used to confirm all the resolution of the function codes which are relevant
to frequency.
1: One digit after the decimal point (0.1Hz).
2: Two digits after the decimal point (0.01Hz).
A0-21 Acceleration/Deceleration time unit Range: 0~ 2
Default: 1
For the purpose to meet every kinds of demand, OD9L can provide 3 kinds of decelerating
time unit, respectively are 1 second, 0.1 second and 0.01 second.
0: 1s
1: 0.1s
2: 0.01s 78
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
Attention: When modifying this function parameter, the decimal places display of the 4 groups of accelerating/ decelerating time will change and the corresponding accelerating/ decelerating time will also change. So be careful about it.
A0-22 Acceleration/Deceleration time base frequency Range: 0~ 2 Default: 0 This parameter is used to define the reference frequency of the accelerating/ decelerating time,
you can see from fig.5-2 of its implication. 0: Maximum frequency (A0-14)
1: Set frequency
2: Rated motor frequency
A0-23 Acceleration time 1
Range: 0.0s3000.0s<1> Default: 10.0s
A0-24 Deceleration time 1
Range: 0.0s3000.0s<1> Default: 10.0s
<1> represent the range of acceleration time unit A0-21. When A0-21=0, the value is
0s~30000s; when A0-21=2, the value is 0.00s~300.00s.
Acceleration time of inverter means the required time from zero frequency to base frequency
of acceleration/ deceleration (determined by A0-22) like t1 in fig.5-2.
Deceleration time of inverter means the required time from base frequency of acceleration/
deceleration (determined by A0-22) to zero frequency like t2 in fig.5-2.
Output frequency Hz
Base frequency of acceleration/deceleration
Set frequency
Actual Acceleration Time t1
Set acc time t1
t
Actual Deceleration Time t2
Set dec time t2
Fig.5-2 Illustration of acceleration/ deceleration time
Group 1A0-23A0-24; Group 3A7-05A7-06;
Group 2A7-03A7-04; Group 4A7-07A7-08;
A0-25 Over modulation voltage boost percentage Range: 0%~10% Default: 3% This parameter is used to improve the voltage output ability of the inverter constant power
area assuming that the rated voltage is 100%. The bigger the value, the better the improving ability, but the more waves in current. so be careful on the operation. Generally, there is no need to change it.
A0-26 Carrier frequency
Range:0.5kHz16.0kHz Default: model dependent
This function is used to adjust the carrier frequency of the inverter. By adjusting the carrier
frequency, the motor noise can be reduced, and the resonance of the mechanical system can be
79
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
avoided, so that the leakage current to earth and the interference of the inverter can be reduced. When the carrier frequency is low, the output current higher harmonic component is increased,
the motor loss is increased, and the motor temperature rise is also be increased. When the carrier frequency is high, this motor loss is reduced, and the motor temperature is
decreased, but both inverter loss and temperature rise will be increased and so will the interference. Adjusting carrier frequency will have influences on below items:
Carrier frequency
Low high
Motor noise
High low
Output current waveform
Poor good
Motor temperature rise
High low
Inverter temperature rise
Low high
Leakage current
Low high
External radiation interference
Low high
The default setting of the carrier frequency is different of inverters with different power. Although users can modify it according to their own need, still need to pay attention of these: if setting the carrier frequency higher than the default, the heat sink temperature will rise, so users should derate to use the inverter or it has the risk of temperature alarm.
Inverter power 0.75Kw5.5Kw 7.5Kw75Kw 90Kw450Kw
Carrier frequency range 0.5kHz16.0kHz 0.5kHz16.0kHz 0.5kHz16.0kHz
Default of carrier frequency 6.0kHz 4.0kHz 2.0kHz
A0-27 Carrier frequency adjustment with temperature Range: 0~ 1 Default: 1 0: Invalid 1: Valid: the inverter can adjust the carrier frequency according to its own temperature, with
which it can decrease the possibility to have overheat alarm.
A0-28 Initialization parameters
Range: 0~ 4
Default: 0
0:No operation.
1:Restore factory parameters, except motor parameters, record information and A0-20.
2:Clear the record information, including error record group U0, accumulated power-on time A7-34, accumulated running time A7-35 and power consumption A7-73.
3:Backup the current user parameters.
4:User parameter backup recovery.
A0-29 LCD upload or download parameter Range: 0~ 4 selection
Default: 0
80
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
Download is that function code parameter values are stored to LCD by inverter. Upload is that the inverter parameters stored values are written to inverter by LCD , Therefore, LCD should first be downloaded prior to the upload parameters parameter. 0 no function 1Download parameter to LCD 2only uploadA1 function parameters
3:Upload parameters except theA1 group
4: Upload all the parameters
5.2 Group A1 Motor Parameter
A1-00 Auto-tuning selection
Range:0~2
Default: 0
Caution: Prior to tuning, it must set the correct rated parameters (A1-01A1-06) of the motor.
0: No operation, that is No-Tuning.
1:Static tuning, it is suitable for the occasion that motor and load is hard to take off so it can't
have rotary tuning.
Operation description: Set this function code to 1 and then confirm to press the RUN key, the
inverter will operate static tuning.
2: complete tuning
To ensure the dynamic control performance on the inverter, please select the rotary tuning, and
the motor must be disconnected with the loads (no-load) in the process of the rotary tuning. After
selection of rotary tuning, the inverter conduct static tuning firstly. At the end of static tuning, the
motor will accelerate to 80% of the rated motor frequency in accordance with the setup acceleration
time of A1-12 and maintain for a period of time. Then the motor will decelerate to zero speed in
accordance with the setup acceleration time of A1-13, by this time the rotary tuning is finished.
Operation description: Setting this function code to 2 and pressing RUN key, then the inverter
will operate rotary tuning.
Tuning operation description:
When A1-00 is set to 1or 2, pressing ENTER key, "TUNE" will be displayed and flashed, then
press RUN key to operate parameter tuning, at this time the displayed TUNE stops flashing. After
the tuning is completed, the display will return back to stop status interface. Pressing STOP key can
stop the tuning during the process.
The value of A1-00 will automatically restore to 0 at the end of tuning.
A1-01 Motor 1 rated power A1-02 Motor 1 rated voltage A1-03 Motor 1 pole number
A1-04 Motor 1 rated current A1-05 Motor 1 rated frequency
Range: 0.1kW ~ 1000.0kW Range: 0V ~ 1500V Range: 2 ~ 64
Range: 0.1A ~ 6000.00 A<1>
Range: 0.00Hz ~ A0-14
Default: Model dependent Default: 380V Default: Model dependent Default: Model dependent Default: 50.00Hz
81
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
A1-06 Motor 1 rated rotation speed Range: 0rpm ~ 60000rpm
Default: Model dependent
<1> A1-4 has 2 decimal places when the motor rated power A1-01>30KW, and it's 1 decimal
place when A1-1<=30KW. The mentioned function codes are nameplate parameters, regardless
whether use V/F control or vector control, the related parameters must be set according to
nameplate.
In order to have better V/F or vector control performance, it's needed to tuning the parameters,
and the accuracy of the tuning result is closely related to correctly set nameplate parameters.
A1-07 Motor 1 no-load current
Range: 0.01A ~ A1-04<1>
Default: Model dependent
A1-08 Motor 1 stator resistance
Range: 0.001 ~ 65.535<2>
Default: Model dependent
A1-09 Motor 1 rotor resistance
Range: 0.001 ~ 65.535<2>
Default: Model dependent
A1-10 Motor 1 mutual inductive
Range: 0.1Mh ~ 6553.5Mh<2>
Default: Model dependent
Range: A1-11 Motor 1 leakage inductive 0.01Mh t~ 655.35Mh<2>
Default: Model dependent
<1> A1-4 has 1 decimal place when the motor rated power A1-01>30KW, and it's 2 decimal
places when A1-1<=30KW.
<2> Decimal digit plus one when the motor rated power A1-01>30KW, and the decimal
digits are showed as the table when A1-1<=30KW. Generally function code parameters
A1-07~A1-11 are not on the nameplate, so it's gained by tuning. It can only have A1-07~A1-09
three parameters on static tuning while 5 function code on rotation tuning.
Note: motor parameter A1-02~A1-11 will change after modifying A1-01.
A1-12
Acceleration time of complete auto-tuning
Range: 1.0s~ 6000.0s Default: 10.0s
Deceleration time of complete A1-13 auto-tuning
Range: 1.0s~ 6000.0s Default: 10.0s
The above function codes respectively are the acceleration/ deceleration time of the complete
tuning. Users can set the parameters properly according to the actual conditions.
5.3 Group A2 Start-stop Control Function Group
A2-00 Start mode
Range: 0~ 2
Default: 0
0: Direct start: when the DC brake time is non-zero value, it can perform DC braking before
getting start, which suits for the applications where reverse rotation is likely to occur when small
inertial loads are getting start.
1: Speed tracking restart: first of all ,the inverter makes an estimate of motor speed and
direction ,then starts at the frequency in accordance with the tracked motor speed. The rotating motor
is running smoothly without surge. It is suitable for the restart upon transient power failure of large
82
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
inertial loads. 2: Pre-excited start of asynchronous motor: establish a magnetic field before running before
it's used in asynchronous motor, for the purpose to decrease the current surge on start.
A2-01 Rotational speed tracking mode
Range: 0~ 2
Default: 0
To complete the speed tracking process within the shortest time, and then to select the mode of
inverter tracking motor speed.
0: To track from the frequency on power failure, usually choose this mode.
1: To track from target frequency, usually used in restart after a long period of power supply
off .
2: To track from the maximum frequency, and is suitable for the general power generating
loads.
A2-02 Max current of rotational speed tracking Range: 30%150% Default: 100%
A2-03 Rotational speed tracking speed
Range: 1100
Default: 20
In speed tracking restart mode to select the current speed of the rotation tracking. The bigger the
parameter value, the faster the tracking speed. But too fast speed may result in unreliable tracking.
A2-04 Startup frequency
Range: 0.00Hz10.00Hz Default: 0.00Hz
A2-05 A2-06 A2-07
Startup frequency holding time Startup DC braking current Startup DC braking time
Range: 0.0s100.0s Range: 0%100% Range: 0.0s100.0s
Default: 0.0s Default: 0% Default: 0.0s
DC break at start is used when the motor is getting to restart after stop completely.
If the start mode is the direct start, when starting, the inverter firstly performs startup DC break
according to the set startup DC brake current, and then starts to running after the set startup DC
brake time. The larger the DC brake current, the larger the brake force.
The startup DC brake current is regarded as the percentage of rated current of inverter.
A2-08 Acceleration/Deceleration frequency curve selection 0: Linear 1: S-curve
Range: 0~ 1 Default: 0
A2-09
Acceleration time proportion of S-curve start segment
Range: 0.00%80.00%
Default: 20.0%
A2-10
Deceleration time proportion of S-curve start segment
Range: 0.00%80.00%
Default: 20.0%
A2-11 Acceleration time proportion of Range: 0.00%80.00% S-curve end segment
Default: 20.0%
A2-12
Deceleration time proportion S-curve end segment
of Range: 0.00%80.00%
Default: 20.0%
This parameters is used to set the non-impact slow start when drives start acceleration. The
acceleration/deceleration curves are adjusted to different degrees of S-curve by the set value. Using
the S-curve to acceleration or deceleration, the drives will make different acceleration /deceleration
curves according to the original acceleration /deceleration time.
83
Parameter Description
Tips: When acceleration/deceleration time=0, S-curve function is invalid.
Fmax
OD9L User Manual
A2-09 A2-10
A2-11
A2-12
Fig.5-3 Illustration of S-curve Acceleration/deceleration
A2-13 Stop mode
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
0: deceleration stop: after the stop command is valid, the inverter reduces the output frequency
according to deceleration mode and the defined acceleration/deceleration time, and will stop after the
frequency drops to zero
1:free stop: after the stop command, the inverter stops the output immediately. Then the load
stops freely according to the mechanical inertia.
A2-14 Initial frequency of stop DC braking Range: 0.00HzA0-14 Default: 0.00 Hz On the deceleration stop process, it start to DC brake when reach to this frequency. It's easy
to cause over voltage if set too large of this value.
A2-15 Waiting time of stop DC braking
Range: 0.0s100.0s
Default: 0.0s
When the running frequency decelerates to the start frequency of stop DC brake, firstly the
inverter stop the output for a while, then start the DC brake process. It's used to avoid the over
current fault if braking at a high speed.
A2-16 Stop DC braking current
Range: 0%100%
Default: 0%
This parameter is used to set the percentage of the DC brake current, and set 100% as the
rated current. The larger the brake current, more obvious the brake effect is. But it's not suitable to
set A2-17 too large if the braking current is too large.
A2-17 Stop DC braking time
Range: 0.0s36.0s
Default: 0.0s
This parameter is used to set the holding time of the DC brake. It has no DC brake process if
the value is 0.
A2-21 Demagnetization time
Range: 0.01s3.00s
Default: 0.50s
This parameter is used to set the waiting time from the free stop to the next start.
A2-23 Nonstop at instantaneous stop mode selection Range: 02
Default: 0
This parameter is used to prevent the stop for bus under voltage which is caused by voltage
drop of the power grid. It's mostly used in draught fan etc.
0: Ineffective. It's still running with the given frequency when it has a momentary power-off,
but may stop for the under voltage problem.
1: Adjusting the decelerating speed automatically. When the power is off, adjusting the speed
automatically to keep the inverter running still, then accelerating to the target frequency when the
84
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
voltage is recovered. If the time is too long of power-off, the inverter will also stop for the under voltage problem.
2: Decelerating to stop. When it has a momentary power-off or voltage dip, the inverter will decelerate to stop according to A2-24. It need a start signal to restart.
A2-24 A2-25
Deceleration time of nonstop at instantaneous stop Effective voltage of nonstop at instantaneous stop
Range: 0.0s to 100.0s Default: 10.0s Range: 60% to 85% Default: 80%
This parameter is the threshold value to judge if the power grid has a momentary power-off. When the bus voltage is less than A2-25, the inverter will decelerate to keep stable of the bus voltage according to A2-23. 100% correspond to the voltage class of the inverter.
A2-26 Recovery voltage of nonstop at instantaneous stop
Range: 85% to 100% Default: 90%
This parameter is the threshold value to judge if the power grid has return to normal. When the bus voltage is more than A2-26, the inverter will not decelerate. When the holding time >A2-27, the inverter start to accelerate to the set frequency. 100% correspond to the maximum voltage class of the inverter.
A2-27 Detection time of instantaneous stop nonstop recovery voltage
Range: 0.0s to 300.0s Default: 0.3s
This parameter is used for judging the recovery time of power grid voltage. It start to count time when the voltage is higher than A2-26, else otherwise clear to 0.
A2-28 Auto-regulation gain of nonstop at instantaneous stop
Range: 0 to 100
Default: 40
A2-29 Auto-regulation integral time of nonstop at instantaneous stop
Range: 0 to 100
Default: 20
It's effective only when the nonstop at instantaneous stop mode choose A2-23 for the usage
to adjust the speed, and usually no need to modify it.
5.4 Group A3 V/F Control Parameter
This group of function is only effective for V/F control (A0-032), but not effective for the vector control.
V/F control is applicable to the general loads such as draught fans and pumps etc, or the applications where one inverter drives multiple motors, or the inverter power is one level lower or two lever higher than the motor power.
A3-00 V/F curve setting
Range: 0~7
Default: 0
Fan and pump load types can choose square V/F control.
85
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
0: Straight V/F curve. It is suitable for common constant torque load. 1: Multiple point V/F curve. It is suitable for the special loads such as dehydrator and center fugal machine. 2:square V/F curve. It is suitable for the centrifugal loads such as fan and pump. 3~5: Respectively correspond to power 1.7, power 1.5 and power 1.3 of the V/F curve, in places between straight line and square line. 6: VF complete separation mode. The output frequency and output voltage is independent with each other at the moment, and the output frequency is determined by the frequency source, while output voltage is determined by A3-15 (VF separation voltage source). 7: VF half separation mode. V and F are proportional on this condition, but the proportion can be set by voltage source A3-15, and the relationship of V and F are related to the rated voltage and rated frequency of Group F1 motor. Assuming that voltage input is X (X vary between 0~100%), so the relationship of output voltage and output frequency is:
V/F=2*X*(rated voltage of the motor) / (rated frequency of the motor)
A3-01 Torque boost A3-02 Cut-off frequency of torque boost
Range: 0.0%30.0% Range: 0.00 Hz~ A0-14
Default: 0.0% Default: 25.00Hz
To compensate the characteristic of V/F control low frequency torque, it can boost the output voltage of the inverter at the time of low frequency.
If setting the torque boost too large, the motor is easily to overheat and the inverter is easily to over current. In general, the torque boost shall not exceed 8%.
Adjusting this parameter effectively can avoid over current on startup. For the relatively large loads, it is recommend to increase this parameter. For the small loads, this parameter value can be decreased. When the torque boost is set to 0.0, the inverter can adopt auto-torque boost.
Cutoff frequency of torque boost : Under this frequency ,the torque boost is effective; if it exceeds this setup frequency, the torque boost is ineffective. For details please refer to Fig. 5-4.
Vb
V1
f1
fb
V1:Manual Torque Boost Voltage Vb:Maximum Output Voltage f1:Cutoff Frequency of Torque Boost fb:Rated Running Frequency
Fig.5-4 Illustration of Manual Torque Boost
A3-03 A3-04 A3-05
Multi-point V/F frequency 1 (F1) Multi-point V/F voltage 1 (V1) Multi-point V/F frequency 2 (F2)
Range: 0.00Hz to A3-05 Range: 0.0% to 100.0% Range: A0-05 to A3-07
86
Default: 3.00Hz Default: 8.0% Default: 10.00 Hz
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
A3-06 A3-07 A3-08
Multi-point V/F voltage 2 (V2) Multi-point V/F frequency 3 (F3) Multi-point V/F voltage 3 (V3)
Range: 0.0% to 100.0% Range: 0.00Hz to 50.00Hz
Range: 0.0% to 100.0%
Default: 20.0% Default: 50.00 Hz Default: 100.0%
Six parameters from A3-03A3-08 define multi segment of V/F curves. The setup value of V/F curve is generally set according to the characteristics of the motor load. Caution: V1V2V3F1F2F3. If setting the voltage too high in low frequency, the motor may be overheat even burned, and the inverter may have speed loss for over current or current protection.
Vb V1 V2 V3
f3
f2 f1
fb
fb: Motor rated frequency A1-05 Vb:Motor rated voltageA1-02
Fig.5-5 schematic diagram for V/F curve setup
A3-09 Slip compensation ratio
Range: 0.0% to 200.0% Default: 50.0%
Setting this parameter can compensate the slip in the V/F control mode due to load and reduce the change of rotation speed of the motor following the load change. In general 100% corresponds to the rated slip of the motor with rated load.
This parameter can be properly increased when the motor speed is lower than the giving speed, oherwise decrease it. Usually there is no need to adjust it.
A3-10 V/F magnetic flux brake gain
Range: 0~200
Default: 100
This parameter can restrain the bus voltage rising on the decelerating process. The bigger the
value, the better the restrain effect.
Flux brake increases the motor current by increase the output voltage of inverter, thus
restraining bus voltage rising by improving the feedback energy consuming ability. The larger the
gain, the larger the motor current, so be careful on the operation. If on the occasions with braking
resistance, it's suggested setting this value to 0, otherwise it may come with errors on the
decelerating process for the reason that the decelerating current is too large.
A3-11 Oscillation suppression gain
Range: 0 to 100 Default: model dependent
This parameter is used to restrain motor oscillation. Please increase this value properly when the motor has oscillation, but try to decrease it when there is no oscillation to avoid affecting V/F running. Usually there is no need to modify it.
87
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
A3-13 Slip compensation time
Range: 0.02s to 1.00s Default: model dependent
This parameter is used to set the slip compensation time. Decreasing this value can increase the respond speed, but the speed fluctuation may be enlarged. Increasing this value can improve the stability of speed, but the respond speed decreased. Usually there is no need to modify it.
A3-15 Output voltage source for voltage Range: 0~7 and frequency separation
Default: 0
0: Digital setting (A3-16).
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: Multi-segment command
4: Simple PLC
5: PID
6: Communication giving
7: Pulse setting (HDI)
100.0% corresponds to the rated motor voltage.
A3-16
Voltage digital setting for V/F separation
Range: 0 V ~ rated motor voltage
Default: 0
This parameter is used to set the V/F separation voltage and the voltage output value when voltage source is digital setting value.
A3-17 Voltage rise time of V/F separation Range: 0.0s to 3000.0s Default:1. 0s
This parameter is used to set the acceleration time of the output voltage from 0 to rated voltage when V/F separates.
A3-18 Voltage decline time of V/F Range: 0.0s to 3000.0s separation
Default:1. 0s
This parameter is used to set the deceleration time of the output voltage from rated voltage to 0 when V/F separates.
A3-19
Stop mode selection upon V/F separation
Range: 0~1
0: Frequency is independent with voltage declining time.
1: Frequency declining after voltage declines to 0.
Default:0
5.5 Group A4 Vector Control Parameter
88
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
Group A3 function code is effective only for vector control, that is to say , it's effective when A0-030 shown active, and it's ineffective when A0-032.
A4-00 A4-02 A4-04
A4-05
A4-06
A4-07
Switchover frequency 1 Switchover frequency 2 Speed loop proportional gain at low frequency Speed loop integral time at low frequency Speed loop proportional gain at high frequency Speed loop integral time at high frequency
Range: 1.00Hz to A4-02 Range: A4-00 to A0-14 Range: 1.0 to 10.0
Range: 0.01s to 10.00s
Range: 1.0 to 10.0
Range: 0.01s to 10.00s
Default: 5.00Hz Default: 10.00Hz Default: 4.00
Default: 0.50s
Default: 2.0
Default: 1.00s
The speed dynamic response characteristics of the vector control can be adjusted by setting the proportional coefficient and integration time of the speed regulator. Increasing the proportional gain or reducing the integration time both can accelerate the dynamic response of the speed loop. However, the proportional gain is too large or the integration time is too short both can cause the oscillation of the system. Proposed adjustment method:
If the factory default parameters can't meet the requirements, thus the relevant parameters values should be subject to fine tuning. Firstly increasing the proportional gain to ensures no oscillation to the system; then reducing the integration time to make the system have quick response characteristic but small overshoot.
Caution: Improper PI parameter setting may result in the large speed overshoot, and even cause voltage fault when the overshoot drops.
A4-04 A4-05
A4-06 A4-07
A4-00
A4-02
Frequency
Fig.5-6 Switching diagram of the speed loop PI parameter
A4-08 Speed loop integral property
Range: 0~1
Default:0
0:Integral takes effect on acceleration/ deceleration process, and it has fast response on fast acceleration occasions, but may cause overshoot.
1: Integral separation on acceleration/ decoration process, it can effectively reduce speed overshoot on fast acceleration occasions, but the respond speed will decrease.
89
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
A4-11 Torque adjustment proportional gain Kp Range:0~30000 Default:2200
A4-12 Torque adjustment integral gain Ki
Range:0~30000 Default:1500
A4-13 Excitation adjustment proportional gain Kp Range:0~30000 Default:2200
A4-14 Excitation adjustment integral gain Ki
Range:0~30000 Default:1500
Vector control current loop PI adjustment parameter can be obtained after the complete tuning
of asynchronous motor, and there is no need to modify it generally.
The current loop integral adjuster doesn't take time as dimension, but setting the integral gain
directly. If setting the current loop too large, it may have circuit oscillation. So when current
oscillation or torque fluctuation is too big, it's better to manually decrease the PI proportion gain
or integral gain.
A4-15 Vector flux braking gain
Range:0 to 200 Default:0
This parameter can be used to restrain the bus voltage rising on the deceleration process, the bigger the value, the better the suppression effect
It's by increasing output voltage of inverter to increase the motor current, thus improve the consumption ability of the feedback energy for flux brake to restrain the bus voltage rising. Take care that the bigger the gain, the bigger the motor current. At the same time, it's suggested to set this value to zero on occasions with brake resistor, otherwise it may have fault cause by larger current on deceleration process.
A4-16 Field weakening torque correction ratio Range:50% to 200% Default: 100%
This parameter is used to revise the torque value on constant power area, and there is no need to modify it generally.
A4-17 Slip compensation gain
Range:50% to 200% Default: 100%
This parameter is used to adjust the steady speed precision of the motor. When the rotation speed is too large, the parameter need to be adjusted smaller and vice versa.
A4-18 Speed loop feedback filter time constant Range:0.000s to 1.000s
Default: 0.015s
This parameter is used to set the filter time constant of speed feedback value. Increasing this value can improve the speed stabilization, but decrease the respond speed; while decreasing this value can improve the respond speed, but low down the speed stabilization. There is no need to modify it generally.
A4-19 Speed loop output filter time constant
Range:0.000s to 1.000s
Default: 0.000s
This parameter is used to set the filter time constant for torque giving value, and it's useful to improve the stabilization of rotation speed. Generally, there is no need to set.
A4-20 Source of power-driven torque upper limit 90
Range:0~4
Default: 0
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
0: A4-21 1: AI1, AI line setting refers to A5-15~A5-19; multi-point curve setting refer to A5-45 and group AE. 2: AI2, AI line setting refers to A5-20~A5-24; multi-point curve setting refer to A5-45 and group AE. 3: Communication giving, it's written in directly by the host machine communication address, in which 100% correspond to A4-21. For details please refer to appendix A OD9L Modbus communication protocol. 4: Pulse giving, please refer to function code A5-30~A5-33 setting description, in which 100% correspond to A4-21.
A4-21 Power-driven torque upper limit
Range:0.0% to 200.0% Default: 150.0%
This parameter is used to set the power-driven torque upper limit of the inverter. It's power-driven when the actual direction of the motor is same as the torque direction, otherwise it's braking.
On occasions which power-driven torque and braking torque need different setting value, it can set them separately by A4-21 and A4-23. For example on the occasion with cam load, for it has periodic conversion of power-driven and braking status, at this moment decreasing the braking torque upper limit A4-23 can effectively decreasing the bus voltage rising and not affect normal load carry.
A4-22 Upper limit source of braking torque Range:0~4
Default: 0
0: A4-23 1: AI1, AI line setting refers to A5-15~A5-19, multi-point curve setting refers to A5-45 and group AE. 2: AI2, AI line setting refers to A5-20~A5-24, multi-point curve setting refers to A5-45 and group AE. 3: Communication giving, it's written in directly by the host machine communication address, in which 100% correspond to A4-21. For details please refer to appendix A OD9L Modbus communication protocol. 4: Pulse giving, please refer to function code A5-30~A5-33 setting description, in which 100% correspond to A4-23.
A4-23 Braking torque upper limit
Range:0.0% ~ 200.0% Default: 150.0%
This parameter is used to set the brake torque upper limit. It's power-driven when the actual direction of the motor is same as the torque direction, otherwise it's braking.
5.6 Group A5 Input Terminal
OD9L series of inverters are equipped with 7 digital multi-function terminals (HDI can be used as high speed pulse input terminal) and 2 analog input terminals.
A5-00 DI1 terminal function
Range: 0~53
Default: 1
91
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
A5-01 A5-02 A5-03 A5-04 A5-05 A5-06
DI2 terminal function DI3 terminal function DI4 terminal function DI5 terminal function DI6 terminal function HDI terminal function
Range: 0~53 Range: 0~53 Range: 0~53 Range: 0~2 Range: 0~53 Range: 0~53
Default: 2 Default: 9 Default: 12 Default: 13 Default: 0 Default: 0
This parameter is used to set the corresponding function of the digital multi-function terminals, for more details please refer to below form.
Tab.5-1 DI terminal function description
Set value
Function
0 No function
Forward rotation 1
(FWD) Reverse rotation 2 (REV) 3 Three-line mode running control 4 Forward Jog (FJOG) Reverse Jog 5 (RJOG)
6 Terminal UP
7 Terminal DOWN
8 Free stop 9 Fault reset
(RESET)
10 Running pause
Description
Even when there is signal input, the inverter still has no action. The no operation function can be set on the untapped terminals so as to prevent errors.
Control the forward rotation and reverse rotation of the inverter via the external terminals.
This terminal is used to confirm that the inverter running mode is three-line control mode.
FJOG refers to Jog forward rotation, while RJOG refers to Jog reverse rotation. For details regarding frequency and Jog acceleration/deceleration time during the Jog running, refer to A7-00, A7-01 and A7-02 function codes.
When the frequency is given by the external terminals, it is used as increment and decrement commands of frequency modification When the frequency source is set to digital setup. The change rate of Up/Down is up to A5-12. The inverter locks the output, and the motor stop process is beyond the inverter control. It is the general method adopted when there is huge load and no requirement for the stop time. External fault reset function. It is the same as the function of RESET key on the keyboard. The inverter decelerates to stop, but all the running parameters are in memory status, such as PLC parameter, swing frequency parameter and PID parameter. After this signal disappears, the inverter restores to the status before stopping.
92
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
Set value
11 12 13 14 15
16
17
Function
External fault normally open input MS speed terminal 1 MS speed terminal 2 MS speed terminal 3 MS speed terminal 4 Speed-up/speed-dow n time selection terminal 1 Speed-up/speed-dow n time selection terminal 2
Frequency source 18 switching
UP and DOWN setup 19 clear (terminal and
keyboard)
Running command 20 switching terminal
Speed-up/speed21
down prohibited 22 PID Pause 23 PLC status reset
Swing frequency 24
pause 25 Timer trigger input
26 Brake command
Description
After the external fault signal is sent to the inverter, the inverter reports fault and stops.
It can realize 16 segment of setting through the combination of digital status of these four terminals. More details please refer to table 5-2.
It can select four types of speed-up/speed-down time through the combination of digital status of these two terminals. More details please refer to table 5-3.
It can switch the frequency source of main frequency source and A0-10 setting through this terminal. For more details please refer to table 5-3. When the frequency reference is digital frequency reference, this terminal can be used to clear the frequency value modified by UP/DOWN and thus restore the reference frequency to the setup value of A0-11. When the command source is not keyboard, it performs switching between terminal control and keyboard control via this terminal. When the command source is communication, it performs switching between communication control and keyboard control via this terminal. Protect the inverter from affecting by the external signals (except stop command), and maintain the current frequency. PID is inactive temporarily, and the inverter maintains the current frequency output. PLC pauses during the execution process. When it reruns, it can effectively restore to the initial status of simple PLC via this terminal. The inverter output with central frequency. Swing frequency pauses. Timer trigger input signal, when the valid time reached the set close or break time, thus the timer output function is effective. It need to work cooperatively with NO.17 function, A7-39 and A7-40 of Y1 output. When this terminal is enabled, the inverter conduct DC brake immediately. The brake current is set by A2-16.
93
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
Set value
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38
39
40
41 42 43
Function
External fault normally closed input
Counter input
Counter reset
Length count input
Length reset Torque control prohibited. Pulse frequency input Frequency modification forbidden. PID action direction reverse.
External STOP terminal1
Command source switchover terminal 2
PID integral pause
Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency Switchover between motor 1 and motor 2 Reserved
PID parameter switchover
Description
After the external fault signal is sent to the inverter, the inverter reports fault and stops. Counter pulse input terminal, work cooperatively with Ab-08 to realize the present counter function. Clear the count value to zero. Input terminal of the length count, work cooperatively with Ab-05~Ab-07 to realize the fixed length features. Clear the length count to zero. Prohibit the inverter to use torque control mode and the inverter switches to speed control.
Pulse input terminal (only effective to HDI)
When this function is enable, the inverter will not respond to frequency.
When this function is enable, the direction of PID is opposite to that of AA-04. When command source A0-04 is operation panel, it can stop the inverter by this terminal which is equivalent to the STOP key on the panel.
It's used to switch between terminal control and communication control.
When this terminal is enabling, the PID integral will pause, but PID proportion and differential adjustment are still valid.
When this terminal is enable, use preset frequency (A0-11) to replace frequency source X.
When this terminal is enable, use preset frequency (A0-11) to replace frequency source Y.
Realize the switchover function between motor 1 and motor 2.
Use the first group of PID parameter when this terminal is invalid, while use the second group PID parameter when it's valid. Details refer to group AA description.
94
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
Set value
Function
Speed 44 control/Torque
control switchover
45 Emergency stop
External STOP 46 terminal 2
47
Deceleration DC injection braking
48 Clear the current running time
Switchover between 49 two-line mode and
three-line mode
50
Reverse run prohibited
51 User-defined fault 1 52 User-defined fault 2
53 Dormant input
Description
Make the inverter switch between torque control mode and speed control mode. When this terminal is invalid, the inverter run with the mode which Ad-10 (speed/torque control mode) defined, and it will switch to another mode when this terminal is valid. The inverter will stop with the maximum speed when this terminal is valid, and the current is in the upper limit on this period. This function is used on the occasion which requires stop as soon as possible when the system is in urgency. It can use this terminal to make the inverter decelerate to stop on any control mode (panel control, terminal control and communication control). At this moment the decelerating time is fixed as decelerating time 2 (A7-04). When this terminal is valid, the inverter decelerates to stop on the initial frequency of DC brake, and then switch to the current brake status. When this terminal is valid, the latest running time of the inverter will be cleared to zero. This function should work cooperatively with timer running (A7-36) and present time set value (A7-38).
It's used to switch between three wire mode and two wire modes.
The inverter is prohibited to reverse when this terminal is valid.
When this terminal is valid, the inverter output faults Err30.
When this terminal is valid, the inverter output faults Err31. Control the sleep function by external terminal. That is, sleep function is forcible to take effect when the switch is closed; when the switch is open, the inverter is forcible to exit the sleep status and enter the wake running status (irrelevant to PID operation).
Tab.5-2 Multistage command function description
K4
K3
K2
K1 Frequency setting Corresponding Parameter
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MS speed 0
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
MS speed 1
AC-00 AC-01
95
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
MS speed 2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MS speed 3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
MS speed 4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
MS speed 5
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
MS speed 6
OFF
ON
ON
ON
MS speed 7
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
MS speed 8
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
MS speed 9
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
MS speed 10
ON
OFF
ON
ON
MS speed 11
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
MS speed 12
ON
ON
OFF
ON
MS speed 13
ON
ON
ON
OFF
MS speed 14
ON
ON
ON
ON
MS speed 15
AC-02 AC-03 AC-04 AC-05 AC-06 AC-07 AC-08 AC-09 AC-10 AC-11 AC-12 AC-13 AC-14 AC-15
4 multi segment command terminals can composed to 16 kinds of status, and the different status correspond to 16 command setting value, the details are showed in table 5-2.
Tab.5-3 Acceleration/Deceleration time selective terminal function description
Terminal 2
OFF
Terminal 1
OFF
Speed-up/speed-dow n
time selection Speed-up time 1
Corresponding Parameter A0-23A0-24
OFF
ON
Speed-up time 2
A7-03A7-04
ON
OFF
Speed-up time 3
A7-05A7-06
ON
ON
Speed-up time 4
A7-07A7-08
A5-10 DI filter time
Range: 0.000s ~ 1.000s Default: 0.010s
It's used to set the sensitivity of the DI terminal. It's easily to disturbed if confronted with
digital input terminals. You can increase the parameter to improve the ant jamming ability, but it
will result in lower sensitivity of the terminal.
A5-11 Terminal command mode
Range: 0~3
Default: 0
This parameter has defined 4 different ways which control the inverter through external terminals.
0: Two wire control mode 1: This mode is the most commonly used two wire mode. Forward running or reverse running is controlled by the command from FWD or REV terminal.
96
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
k1 k2 Command
0 0 Stop
1 0 Forward
0 1 Reverse
11
Stop
CM53XH
k1
k2
FWD REV
COM/+24V
Fig.5-7 two wire control mode 1 1: Two wire control mode 2: Start/Stop terminal is the enabled terminal in this mode. The direction depends on the status of FWD/REV terminal.
k1 k2 Command
00
Stop
CM53XH
01 10 11
Stop Forward Reverse
k1
k2
Start/Stop FWD/REV
COM/+24V
Fig.5-8 two wire control mode 2
2: Three wire control mode 1: Din is the enabled terminal on this mode. The direction is controlled by FWD or REV terminal. The pulse is effective and the Din terminal signal must be cut off at stop. Din is the multi-function input terminal; the corresponding terminal function should be defined as NO. 3 function "three wire mode running control".
CM53XH
SB1 Stop button
SB2
SB1 SB2 FWD button
SB3 SB3 REV button
FWD
DIn REV COM/+24V
Fig.5-9 Three wire control mode 1
SB1: Stop button SB2: Forward rotation button SB3: Forward rotation button Din is multifunctional input terminals of DI1 to DI5.In this way, it shall define the
97
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
corresponding terminal functions as No.3 function "Three-line Mode Running Control". 3: Three wire control mode 2: Din is the enabled terminal on this mode. FWD terminal gives
the running command and the direction depends on the status of the REV terminal. The Din signal must be cut off at stop. Din is the multi-function input terminal; the corresponding terminal function should be defined as NO. 3 function "three wire mode running control".
K Direction select
0
Forward
SB2
1
Reverse
SB1
SB1
SB2
K
Stop button Run button
CM53XH
FWD DIn REV COM/+24V
Fig.5-10 Three wire control mode 2
SB1: Stop button SB2: Running button Din is multifunctional input terminals of DI1 to DI5. In this way, it shall define the corresponding terminal functions as No.3 function "Three-line Mode running Control".
A5-12 Terminal UP/DOWN rate Range: 0.01Hz/s to 100.00Hz/s Default: 1.00Hz/s
Terminal UP/DOWN are used to adjust the rate of change when setting the frequency.
A5-13 Terminal effective logic 1 Range: 00000 to 11111
Default: 00000
0: high level
1: low level
Unit's digit: DI1
Ten's digit: DI2
Hundred's digit: DI3
Thousand's digit: DI4
Myriabit: DI5
DI1~DI5 terminal effective level selection is used to set the valid status mode of the digital
input terminals.
When choosing it's effective on high level, it's valid on the connection between the
corresponding DI terminals and COM, but invalid on the disconnection.
When choosing it's effective on low level, it's invalid on the connection between the
corresponding DI terminals and COM, but valid on the disconnection.
A5-15 A5-16 A5-17
AI1 minimum input Corresponding setting of AI1 minimum input AI1 maximum input
Range: 0.00V to 10.00V Range: -100.0% to 100.00% Range: 0.00V to 10.00V 98
Default: 0.00V Default: 0.0% Default: 10.00V
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
Corresponding setting of AI1 Range: -100.0% to
A5-18
maximum
100.00%
Default: 100.0%
A5-19 AI1 filter time
Range: 0.00s to 10.00s
Default: 0.10s
The above function codes have defined the relationship between the analog input voltage and
analog input setup value. When the analog input voltage exceeds the setup maximum input or
minimum input range, the excess part will be calculated as maximum input or minimum input.
When the analog input is current input, 1mA current equals to 0.5V voltage (AI2 setting is the
same as AI1 setting).
In different applications, 100% of analog input corresponds to different nominal values. For
details please refer to description of each part.
Several setting examples are shown in the following figures:
100.0%
Corresponding Settings (Frequency, Torque, etc.
100.0%
Corresponding Settings (Frequency, Torque, etc.
0V 0mA
10V 20mA
AI
0.0% 0V
0mA
AI
-100.0%
Fig.5-11 Corresponding Relationship between Analog Reference and Setting
A5-20 AI2 minimum input Corresponding setting of AI2
A5-21 minimum input
A5-22 AI2 maximum input Corresponding setting of AI2
A5-23 maximum
A5-24 AI2 filter time It's the same as AI1.
Range: 0.00V to 10.00V Range: -100.0% to 100.00% Range: 0.00V to 10.00V Range: -100.0% to 100.00% Range: 0.00s to 10.00s
Default: 0.00V Default: 0.0% Default: 10.00V Default: 100.0% Default: 0.10s
A5-30 Pulse minimum input
Range: 0.00KHz to 50.00KHz
Corresponding setting of A5-31 pulse minimum input
Range: -100.0% to 100.00%
A5-32 Pulse maximum input
Range: 0.00KHz to 50.00KHz
Corresponding setting of A5-33 pulse maximum input
Range: -100.0% to 100.00%
A5-34 Pulse filter time
Range: 0.00s to 10.00s
PULSE input quantization is similar to analog quantization.
Default: 0.00KHz Default: 0.0% Default: 50.00KHz Default: 100.0% Default: 0.10s
A5-35 DI1 On delay time
Range: 0.0s to 3600.0s
Default: 0.0s
99
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
A5-36 DI1 Off delay time
Range: 0.0s to 3600.0s
Default: 0.0s
A5-34 DI2 On delay time
Range: 0.0s to 3600.0s
Default: 0.0s
A5-34 DI2 Off delay time
Range: 0.0s to 3600.0s
Default: 0.0s
A5-34 DI3 On delay time
Range: 0.0s to 3600.0s
Default: 0.0s
A5-34 DI3 Off delay time
Range: 0.0s to 3600.0s
Default: 0.0s
It's used to set the delay time when DI terminals have status change. At present it only works
for DI1, DI2 and DI3.
A5-41 AI1 function selection as DI terminal
Range: 0 to 53
Default: 0
A5-42 AI2 function selection as DI terminal
Range: 0 to 53
Default: 0
This parameter is used to set if take AI as digital terminal, and it has the same function as
normal terminal when used as digital terminal.
Caution: the input range of AI keeps still as 0~10V, it's in high level when AI voltage>6V,
while in low level AI voltage<4. It has hysteresis of 2V in the process. That is to say, AI rising
from 0V in high level only when voltage >6V, and in low level only when voltage decreasing
from >6V to 4V.
A5-44 AI effective mode selection as DI terminal Range: 0X00~0X11 Default: 0X00
This parameter is used set the electric level selection when AI is used as digital DI terminal.
0: High level is effective. AI rising from 0V in high level only when voltage >6V, and in low
level only when voltage decreasing from >6V to 4V.
1: low level is effective. AI rising from 0V in low level only when voltage >6V, and in low
level only when voltage decreasing from >6V to 4V.
Unit's digit: AI1;
Ten's digit: AI2.
A5-45 AI curve selection
Range: 00~22
Default: 00
This parameter is used for AI curve selection. Zero represent straight line, 1 and 2 both are
4-point curve. Every curve has its own setting function code.
Unit's digit: AI1
0: 2-point straight line A5-15~A5-19
1: multi-point curve 1: AE-00~AE-07
2: multi-point curve 2: AE-08~AE-15
Ten's digit: AI2
0: 2-point straight line A5-20~A5-24
1: multi-point curve 1: AE-00~AE-07
2: multi-point curve 2: AE-08~AE-15
Hundred's digit: reserved
A5-46 AI input type selection
Range: 00~11
Default: 00
This parameter is used to set AI signal input type. AI signal input type need to in one-to-one
correspondence with hardware AI input type (voltage type, current type) and it's beneficial to
improve the accuracy and linearity of AI signal sampling.
100
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
5.7 Group A6 Output Terminal
OD9L series of inverter has standard configuration of 2 multi-function analog output terminals, 1 multi-function digital output terminal and 2 multi-function relay output terminals.
A6-00 A6-01 A6-02
Relay 1 output selection Relay 2 output selection Y1 output selection
Range: 00~45 Range: 00~45 Range: 00~45
Default: 2 Default: 1 Default: 1
The multifunctional digital output terminal function selection is as below:
Set value
0
Function No function
Description No function of terminal output.
1 In running
Means that the inverter is running with output frequency (0 value as option) and output ON signal.
2 Fault output
The inverter is in trouble and output ON signal.
Frequency
3 Level detection Refer to function code A7-22A7-23 for details
FDT arrival
4 Frequency arrival Refer to A7-24 for details.
5 In zero speed
The inverter is running with zero output frequency; output ON signal.
To judge according to overload predicted values before the
Motor overload motor electronic thermal protection take action, after exceeding
6
pre-alarm
the predicted values output ON signal. Details refers to A9-00
A9-02.
7
Inverter overload After checking the inverter overload,to move up early 10s
pre-alarm
before the protection occurs, and output ON signal.
PLC cycle 8
finished
To send a pulse signal with width of 250ms as simple PLC running at the end of one-time cycle .
The accumulated running time on the inverter is more than the
9
Running time off setting time of ON signal, accumulated time is set by A7-20.
In frequency 10 limited
When the setting frequency exceeds the upper or lower frequency, and the inverter output frequency reach the upper or lower frequency, it gives ON signal.
The main circuit and control circuit source power is established, 11 Ready for running
the inverter is in running without protection to send ON signal.
12 AI1>AI2
The analog input AI1 value is more than the other AI2 `s, output ON signal.
Frequency 13 upper limit
arrival
Output ON signal when the running frequency comes to the upper frequency A0-16.
101
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
Frequency 14 lower limit
arrival
Output ON signal when the running frequency comes to the lower frequency A0-18.
Under voltage 15
status output
Output ON signal in the status of under voltage.
Communication 16 setting
Communication setting please refer to appendix A.
When the timer can realize the function of time relay, and valid
Timer output 17
function
time of timer input signal reaches the set close or open time, thus the timing ouput function is valid. It need to work in cooperatively with DI input NO.25 funcion and function code
A7-39, A7-40.
18 Reverse running Output ON signal when the inverter is in reverse running.
19 Reversed
Output ON signal when the detected length exceeds the set 20 Set length arrived
length
21 Torque limiting
Stalling protection function works automatically on torque limiting function.
22 Current 1 arrived Refer to description of function code A7-45 and A7-46.
23 Frequency 1 arrived
Refer to description of function code A7-43 and A7-44.
Module 24 temperature
arrived
Output ON signal when inverter module radiator temperature (A7-32) reaches the set module temperature (A7-69).
25 Off load
Output ON signal when the inverter is in off load status.
Accumulated
Output ON signal when accumulated power-on time (A7-33)
26
power-on time exceeds the power-on arrived time set by A7-51.
arrived
Running time 27
arrived
When timing function selection (A7-36) is effective, output ON signal after this running time arrived the setting time (A7-38).
28 Reserved
Set count value
29
arrived
Output ON signal when the count value reaches the set value of Ab-08.
30 Fixed count value Output ON signal when the detected length count value reaches
arrive
the setting value of Ab-09.
Motor 1, motor 2
31
Output ON signal when the present motor is motor 2.
indication
32 Mechanical brake Output ON signal when mechanical brake is effective, details control output refers to group E5.
Zero speed 33
running 2
Output ON signal when output frequency is zero. The signal is also ON in stop status.
102
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
34 35 36
37
38 39 40 41~42 43 44 45
Frequency level detection FDT2 arrived Zero curent status Software current overrun Frequency lower limit arrived and output on stop
Alarm output
Reserved
AI1 input overrun
Reserved Frequency arrival 2 Current arrival 2 Fault output (no output on under voltage)
Please refer to description of A7-55 and A7-56.
Please refer to description of A7-59 and A7-60. Please refer to description of A7-61 and A7-62.
Output ON signal when the running frequency reaches the upper limit. The signal is also ON in stop status. The inverter has alarm output when there is fault and the dealing mode of the fault is keep running.
Output ON signal when AI1 analog input value is less than A7-67 (AI1 input protection lower limit) or more than A7-68 (AI1 input protection upper limit).
Please refer to description of A7-57 and A7-58. Please refer to description of A7-63 and A7-64. Output ON signal when it has fault on the inverter and no output on under voltage.
A6-04 FM terminal output selection
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
A6-05 FMR output selection
Range: 0~45
Default: 0
FM terminal can not only used as high speed pulse terminal(A6-04=0), but also used as
switching value output terminal (A6-04=1) of open collector. When FM terminal is used as FMP,
the maximum output frequency is up to A6-12, and the corresponding function output is up to
A6-11.
A6-09 AO1 output selection
Range: 0~16
Default: 0
A6-10 AO2 output selection
Range: 0~16
Default: 0
A6-11 FMP output selection
Range: 0~16
Default: 0
Analog output AO1 and AO2 output range is 0V~10V, or 0mA~20mA.
The relationship of analog output range and the corresponding function is as below table:
Setup value
Function
Range
Running
0
frequency
0maximum output frequency, that is to say, 100% corresponds to the maximum frequency.
Setup 1
frequency
0maximum output frequency, that is to say, 100% corresponds to the maximum frequency.
02 times of the motor rated current, that is to say, 100%
2
Output current corresponds to 2 times motor rated current.
103
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
02 times of the rated power, that is to say, 100% corresponds to 3 Output power
2 times motor rated power.
01.2 times of the inverter rated voltage, that is to say, 100%
4
Output voltage corresponds to 1.2 times motor rated voltage.
5 AI1
010V (0~20mA), that is to say, 100% corresponds to10V or 20mA.
6 AI2
010V (0~20mA), that is to say, 100% corresponds to10V or 20mA.
7
Communicatio 0.0%~100.0%, refer to<M420 series inverter communication
n setup
protocol> shown as Appendix for details
Output torque
0~2 times motor rated torque, that is to say, 100% corresponds to
8 (absolute
2 times motor rated torque.
value)
9 Length
0~2 times set length, 100% corresponds to 2 times set length.
10 Count value
0~2 times set count value, that is to say, 100% corresponds to 2 times set count value.
Motor rotation 0~ maximum frequency (corresponding speed of A0-14), that is to
11
speed
say, 100% corresponds to corresponding speed of A0-14.
12 Bus voltage
0V~1000V, that is to say, 100% corresponds to 1000V.
13 Puse input
0.01kHz~100.00kHz
14 Output current 100% corresponds to 1000.0A.
15 Output voltage 0V~1000V
Output torque 16 (actual value) -2 times motor rated torque~2 times motor rated torque
A6-12 FMP output maximum frequency Range: 0.01~100.00KHz Default: 50.00Hz
A6-13 AO1 minimum output
Range: -100.0% to A6-15 Default: 0.0%
A6-14 Minimum corresponds to AO1 output
Range: 0.00V to 10.00V Default: 0.00v
A6-15 AO1 maximum output
Range: A6-13 to 100.0% Default: 100.0%
Maximum corresponds to AO1 A6-16
output
Range: 0.00V to 10.00V Default: 10.00V
A6-17 AO2 minimum output
Range: -100.0% to A6-19 Default: 0.0%
Minimum corresponds to AO2 A6-18
output
Range: 0.00V to 10.00V Default: 0.00v
A6-19 AO2 maximum output
Range: A6-17 to 100.0% Default: 100.0%
Maximum corresponds to AO2 A6-20 output
Range: 0.00V to 10.00V Default: 10.00V
The above function codes have defined the relationship between output value and analog
104
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
output. When the output value exceeds the maximum or minimum limit range, taking the limit value into operation.
When the analog output is current output, 1mA current corresponds to 0.5V voltage. The 100% output value corresponds to different value on different occasions. Please refer to below chart 5-12, there are a and b two different linear graph.
A0
A6-16=10V
a
A6-14=1V A6-14=0V
A6-13=0.0%
a
b
Corresponding setting A6-15=80.0% A6-15=100.0%
Fig.5-12 Analog output limitation corresponding relationship
A6-26 Relay 1 output delay
Range: 0.0s to 3600.0s Default: 0.0s
A6-27 Relay 2 output delay
Range: 0.0s to 3600.0s Default: 0.0s
A6-28 Y1 high level output delay
Range: 0.0s to 3600.0s Default: 0.0s
It's used to set the delay time of inverter when responding to different output status change,
such as the Y terminal status change or relay output status change.
A6-31 AO signal output type selection
Range: 00~11
Default: 00
It's used to set the AO signal output type. AO output signal type has to be in one-to-one
correspondence with hardware AO output type (voltage type, current type).
5.8 Group A7 Auxiliary Function and Panel Display
A7-00 JOG running frequency
Range: 0.00 Hz to A0-14 Default: 6.00Hz
A7-01 JOG acceleration time
Range: 0.0s to 3000.0s Default: 10.0s
A7-02 JOG deceleration time
Range: 0.0s to 3000.0s Default: 10.0s
The above parameters are used to define the giving frequency and acceleration/deceleration
time of the inverter on jogging. The Jog process is getting to started and to stop according to the start mode 0 (A2-00direct start) and the stop mode 0 ( A2-13,decelerating to stop).
The Jog acceleration time means the time required for the inverter to accelerate from 0Hz to
the maximum output frequency (A0-14).
The Jog deceleration time means the time required for the inverter to decelerate from the maximum output frequencyA0-14to 0Hz.
A7-03 A7-04 A7-05 A7-06 A7-07
Acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 Acceleration time 3 Deceleration time 3 Acceleration time 4
Range: 0.0s to 3000.0s Range: 0.0s to 3000.0s Range: 0.0s to 3000.0s Range: 0.0s to 3000.0s Range: 0.0s to 3000.0s
Default: 10.0s Default: 10.0s Default: 10.0s Default: 10.0s Default: 10.0s
105
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
A7-08 Deceleration time 4
Range: 0.0s to 3000.0s Default: 10.0s
Speed up/down time can choose A0-23, A0-24 and the above three types of speed up/down time, all of them have the same meaning. For more details please refer to descriptions of A0-23 and A0-24.
It can select speed-up/down time 1to 4 in the running process by different combination of multifunctional digital input terminal DI. For more details please refer to funciton code A5-00A5-04.
A7-09 Jump frequency 1
Range: 0.00 Hz to A0-14 Default: 0.00Hz
A7-10 Jump frequency 1 amplitude.
Range: 0.00 Hz to A0-14 Default: 0.00Hz
A7-11 Jump frequency 2
Range: 0.00 Hz to A0-14 Default: 0.00Hz
A7-12 Jump frequency 2 amplitude.
Range: 0.00 Hz to A0-14 Default: 0.00Hz
When the setting frequency is within the jump frequency, actual running frequency will be in
the jump frequency boundary which is near to the set frequency. Setting jump frequency can keep
the inverter off from the mechanical resonance point. These series of inverter can set 2 jump
frequency point. If set the two contiguous jump frequency to the same value, there will be no
function of the frequency here.
Interior frequency command
A7-09
A7-11
A7-10 { A7-10 {
} A7-12 } A7-12
Set frequency command
Fig.5-13 Jump frequency illustration
A7-15 Forward/Reverse rotation dead-zone time Range: 0.0s to 3000.0s Default: 0.0s Setting the transient time on the zero frequency output when the inverter is on the transient
process from the forward to reverse. You can refer to below chart.
Dead zone time
Fig.5-14 Forward/ reverse rotation dead zone illustration
A7-16 Keypad knob accuracy selection
Range: 0~8 106
Default: 0
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
This parameter is used to define the setting frequency resolution of the operation panel on monitor mode. Operate Up/Down to set the resolution for frequency plus or minus.
0: Default mode
1: 0.1Hz
2: 0.5Hz
3: 1Hz
4: 2Hz
5: 4Hz
6: 5Hz
7: 8Hz
8: 10Hz
Running mode when set frequency is A7-17
lower than the lower limit
Range: 0~2
Default: 0
0: Run at frequency lower limit
1: Stop
2: Run at zero speed
It's used to select the running status when setting frequency is lower than the lower limit. In order to avoid the inverter run in long-term low speed, this function can used to stop the machine.
A7-18 Droop rate
Range: 0.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
This function is used to distribute the load when multi motors runs with one load. Droop
control means decreasing the output frequency with load increasing, so the motor with load
decreases more frequency, thereby lower the motor load and make multi motors have uniform load.
This parameter means the drop-out value of output frequency when the inverter output rated load.
Delay time of stopping mode when set A7-19
frequency is lower than the lower limit
Range: 0.0s to 600.0s Default: 0.0s
When setting frequency in lower than the lower limit and action selection is stop, delay the
action with time A7-19.
A7-20 Setting accumulative running time.
Range: 0h to 65000h Default: 0h
Setting the inverter running time in advance. This function is invalid when set it to 0.
When accumulated running time (A7-34) reaches this setting time, multi-function digital
terminal output time arrival signal (multi-function output No.26) ON signal, at the same time,
inverter will alarm fault Err40 (accumulate time arrival fault).
A7-21 JOG preferred 0: valid 1: invalid
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
A7-22 Frequency detection value (FDT1) A7-23 Frequency detection hysteresis
Range: 0.00 Hz to A0-14 Default: 50.00Hz Range: 0.0% to 100.0% Default: 5.0%
107
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
(FDT1 hysteresis) They are used to set the detected value of output frequency and hysteresis value of output action removed.
Output Frequency
FDT Level
FDT Hysteresis
Frequency Detection
t
Signal(Y1 RELAY)
ON
t
Fig.5-15 FDT electrical level illustration
A7-24 Detection range of frequency reached Range: 0.0% to 100.0%
Default: 0.0%
when the output frequency on the inverter reaches the setup frequency value, this function can
be used to adjust the test amplitude as shown in below figure.
Output Frequency
Detected Amplitude
t
Frequency
Detection Signal
ON
ON
(DO1 RELAY)
t
Fig.5-16 Illustration of detected amplitude on frequency arrival
A7-26 Cooling fan control
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
0: Fan continuous running
1: Fan running on inverter running.
It's used to choose the action mode of the cooling fan. If choose status 1, the fan keeps
running on inverter running. When the inverter is stopped, the fan only run on the condition that heat temperature higher than 40, it will stop on condition that temperature is lower than 40.
If choose status 0, the fan keeps running all the time on power-on.
A7-27 STOP/RESET key function
Range: 0~1
0: STOP/RESET key enabled only in keypad control.
1: STOP/RESET key enabled in any operation mode.
Default: 1
A7-28 Quick/JOG function selection
Range: 0~3
Default: 1
Quick/Jog are multi-function key that can be set by this function code. It can switch through
the key on both running or stop status, 108
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
0: Forward jog Realize the function forward jog by Quick/Jog key on the panel. 1: Switch between forward and reverse rotation Realize the function by Quick/Jog key to change the frequency direction, and this function is valid only when the command source is in operation panel channel. 2: Reverse Jog Realize the function reverse jog by Quick/Jog key on the panel. 3: Switch between panel control and remote control (terminal or communication). It means present command source switches to panel control (local operation). If the present command source is panel control, this key is invalid.
A7-29 LED display running parameters
Range: 0000~0xffff
Default: H.401f
This function code set the LED display parameters when inverter is running. If set one of the
function code bit as "1", the corresponding monitor parameter will display. When choose multi
function code to display, it can switch by key "SHIFT" on the panel.
Caution: if this function code is set as H.0000, it will display the running frequency.
Example of setting:
Each hexadecimal value that correspond to the required display value has been calculated,
like fig.5-17, the display value is in one-to-one correspondence with the set value. For example, if
only need to display the bus voltage, set 0004 in A7-29 (H.0004); if it need to display multi value,
just plus the corresponding values. For example, if it need to display bus voltage and output
current, just calculate 0004+0010=0014, set 0014 in A7-29 (H.0014). if the plus result value is
bigger than 10, respectively indicating it by A B C D E F to represent 10 11 12 13 14 15.
Ten's digit: hexadecimal 0F
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4
Unit's digit: hexadecimal 0F
bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Running frequency Setting frequency Bus voltage Output voltage
Output current Output power DI input status
DO output status
0001 0002 0004 0008
0010 0020 0040
0080
Thousand's placehexadecimal 0F
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12
Hundred's placehexadecimal 0F
bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8
AI1 voltage
0100
AI2 Voltage
0200
PID setting value 0400
PID feedback value 0800
Count value Length value
1000 2000
Load speed display 4000
PLC stage
8000
Fig.5-17 LED running display illustration
A7-30 LED display running parameters 2
Range: 0x0~0x1FF
Default: 0x00
109
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
Ten's digit: hexadecimal 0 F
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4
Unit's digit: hexadecimal 0 F
bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Thousand's place hexadecimal 0 F
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12
Hundred's place hexadecimal 0 F
bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8
Target torque % O00u0tp1ut torque % 0002 HDI input linear speed (m/min) M00o0to8r rotation speed (rpm) A00C1i0nput current 0A0c2c0umulative running time(h) 0T0h4e0current running time (min) 0080
Accumulative power cRoensseurvmeption kW·h 0100 dReserve dReserve dReserve dReserve dReserve dReserve d
Fig.5-18 LED running display illustration For setting method please refer to A7-29 as fig.5-17. Setting the corresponding hexadecimal value of the required value in A7-30, then it's get to running display.
A7-31 LED display stop parameters
Range: 0000~0xffff
Default: H.0003
This function code set the LED parameter on inverter stop status. If set one of the function
code bit as "1", the corresponding monitor parameter will display. When choose multi function
code to display, it can switch by key "SHIFT" on the panel.
Ten's digit: hexadecimal 0F
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4
Unit's digit: hexadecimal 0F
bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Setting frequency Bus voltage DI input status DO output status AI1 voltage
AI2 Voltage PID setting value PID feedback value
0001 0002 0004 0008 0010
0020 0040 0080
Thousand's placehexadecimal 0F
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12
Hundred's placehexadecimal 0F
bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8
Count value
1000
Length value
2000
Load speed display 4000
PLC stage
8000
Input pulse frequency 0001
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Fig.5-19 LED stop display illustration
Caution: if this function code is set as H0000, it will display the fault frequency. For setting method please refer to A7-29 as fig.5-17, set the corresponding hexadecimal value in A7-31, thus it's stop display.
110
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
A7-32 Load speed display coefficient
Range: 0.001 to 65.500 Default: 1.000
Through this parameter correspond the output frequency of inverter to load speed. It's usually
used on the occasion which doesn't have high speed pulse but need to display load speed. Load
speed (U1-14) = A7-32*running frequency. The unit can either be linear speed or Hz and specific
value please set it according to the actual condition.
A7-33 Temperature of inverter module
Range: 12 to 100
Default: measured value
Display the temperature of inverse module IGBT, but different inverse module may has
different over temperature protection value.
A7-34 Accumulative power-on time
Range: 0h to 65535h
Default: measured value
Recording the accumulative power-on time of the inverter, and not record it when the time is
less than 1 hour.
A7-35 Accumulative running time
Range: 0h to 65535h
Default: measured value
Recording the accumulative running time of the inverter, and not record it when the time is
less than 1 hour.
A7-37 Current running time function
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
0: Disable
1: Enable:
A7-38 Current running time source
Range: 0~2
Default: 0
0: Digital setting A7-39
1: AI1 (take A7-39 as 100%)
2: AI2
A7-39 Setting of current running time Range: 0.0min to 6500.0min Default: 0.0 min When A7-37 present running timing is valid, and choose 0:A7-39 for present time source;
choose A7-27 for output, output ON signal when running time reaches the setting time. At the same time, the inverter alarm fault Err39 for running time arrival fault.
A7-40 High level timing
Range: 0.0s to 6000.0s
Default: 2.0s
A7-41 Low level timing
Range: 0.0s to 6000.0s
Default: 2.0s
When the timer input terminal "connected" is longer than A7-40. its function output is
connected.
When the timer input terminal `disconnected' is longer than A7-41,its function output is
disconnected.
111
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
Time input Time output
A7-40
A7-41
A7-40
A7-41
Fig.5-20 Timer input and output action diagram
A7-42 Start-up protection
Range: 0~1
Default: 1
0: Invalid
1:Valid
This parameters is used to improve the protection coefficient, if set to 1, there are two
functions 1 When the running command is existed under power on, only remove the running
command firstly can it eliminate the running protection status. 2The running command is still existed when the inverter's fault is reset, only remove the
running command firstly can it eliminate the running protection status.
These actions can prevent the motor running automatically under no awareness to cause
danger. if set it as 0 and the running command is existed under power on, the inverter will start
directly.
Range: 0.00Hz to A7-44 Frequency reached detection value 1 A0-14
Default: 50.00Hz
A7-45 Range of frequency reached detection Range: 0.0% to
value 1
100.0%
Default: 0.0%
When the output frequency reaches the rage of detected value 1 plus or minus, multi-function
terminal output ON signal. For DO output action please refer to fig.5-16.
A7-46 Current detection level 1
Range: 0.0% to 300.0%
Default: 100.0%
Current reached detection duration Range: 0.0% to
A7-47 1
300.0%
Default: 0.0%
When the output current reaches the rage of detected value 1 plus or minus, multi-function
terminal output ON signal.
A7-50 User password
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 0
If setting A7-50 for any non-zero number, the password protection is effective. You must
input the right password the next time into the menu, otherwise you can't check or modify the
function code. So please keep the password in mind.
If setting A7-50 for zero, the password will be cleared and make the protection function
ineffective.
A7-51 Jump frequency during acceleration and deceleration Range: 0 ~1 0: Invalid
112
Default: 0
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
1:Valid
A7-52 Setting power-on reached time
Range: 0h to 65530h Default: 0h
The timing function is invalid if set the function code to zero.
When the accumulated time of power-on reaches the setting value of A7-52, multi-function
output terminal output ON signal.
Frequency switch over point between
Range:
A7-54
Default: 0.00Hz
acceleration time 1 and acceleration time 2 0.00Hz~A0-14
A7-55 Frequency switch over point between
Range:
Default: 0.00Hz
deceleration time 1 and deceleration time 2 0.00Hz~A0-14
When the running frequency on acceleration period is less than A7-54, choose acceleration
time 2 (A7-03); when the running frequency on acceleration period is more than A7-54, choose
acceleration time 1 (A0-23).
When the running frequency on deceleration period is more than A7-55, choose acceleration
time 1 (A0-24); when the running frequency on deceleration period is less than A7-55, choose
deceleration time 2 (A7-04).
A7-56 Frequency detection value (FDT2)
Range: 0.00Hz~A0-14 Default: 50.00Hz
Frequency detect FDT2 hysteresis A7-57 value
Range: 0.0% to 100.0% Default: 5.0%
They have the same meaning as FDT1, for details please refer to A7-22, A7-23 and fig.5-15.
A7-58 Frequency reached detection value Range: 0.00Hz to A0-14 Default: 50.00Hz 2
Range of frequency reached A7-59 detection 2
Range: 0% to 100%
Default: 0.0%
They have same meaning as frequency reached detection time 1, for details please refer to
A7-44, A7-45 and fig.5-16.
A7-60 Zero current detection level
Range: 0% to 300%
Default: 10.0%
A7-61 Zero current detection delay time Range: 0% to 300%
Default: 1.00s
When the output current on running process is less than or equivalent to the detected value,
and the holding time exceeds the zero current detection delay time; the multi-function terminal
choose NO.35 function, output ON signal.
Range: 20.0% to A7-62 Current output detection amplitude 400.0%
Default: 200.0%
Current output detection amplitude Range: 0.00s to
A7-63
delay time
300.00s
Default: 0.00s
When the inverter in running and output current is more than the amplitude detected value
A7-62, and the holding time exceeds software overcurrent detection delay time A7-63; the
multi-function terminal choose NO.36 function, output ON signal.
A7-64 Current detection level 2
Range: 20% to 300% Default: 100.00%
113
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
Current reached detection duration
A7-65
Range: 0.0% to 300.0% Default: 0.00%
3
They have same meaning as current reached detection 1, for details please refer to
descriptions of A7-46 and A7-47
A7-68 AI1 input voltage lower limit
Range: 0.00V to A7-69
Default: 2.00V
A7-69 AI1 input voltage upper limit
Range: A7-68 to 11.00V
Default: 8.00V
When analog input value AI1 is less than A7-68, or AI1 input is more than A7-69, the
multi-function terminal will output ON signal of "AI1 input exceeds the limit". It's used to detect
if AI1 input voltage is within the setting range.
A7-69 Module temperature threshold Range: 0 to 90
Default: 70
When the inverter module temperature reaches the setting range A7-69, multi-function
terminal output ON signal.
A7-70 Output power correction coefficient Range: 0.001 to 3.000 Default: 1.000 Output power display = output power* A7-70 and it can be checked by monitor code U1-05.
A7-71 Linear speed display coefficient
Range: 0.000 to 60.000 Default: 1.000
Linear speed =A7-71*sampling HDI pulse quantity per minute/Ab-07, and it can be checked
by monitor code UI-14.
A7-72 Motor speed display coefficient
Range: 0.000 to 3.0000 Default: 1.000
Motor speed =A7-72*Motor speed ,and it can be checked by monitor code UI-14.
A7-73 Accumulative power consumption
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: measured value
The accumulated power consumption so far can only be checked but not be modified.
A7-74 Performance software version Performance software version number.
Range: 0.00~655.35
A7-75 Function software version Function software version number.
Range: 0.00~655.35
A7-76 Enhancements parameter display selection Range: 0~1 0: Hide the enhancements parameter group: C1~C3, E0~E6. 1: Display the enhancements parameter group: C0~C3, E0~E6.
5.9 Group A8 Communication Parameter
A8-00 Baud rate setting A8-01 Data format
Baud rate setting: 0: 300BPS 1: 600BPS
Range: 0~7 Range: 0~3
114
Default: #.# Default: #.# Default: 0
Default: 5 Default: 0
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
2: 1200BPS 3: 2400BPS 4: 4800BPS 5: 9600BPS 6: 19200BPS 7: 38400BPS Baud rate is the data transfer rate between host machine and inverter. The bigger the baud rate, the faster the communication speed. Data format: 0: No parity check: data format <8,N,2> 1: Even check: data format <8,E,1> 2: Odd check: data format <8,0,1> 3: No parity check 1: data format <8,N,1> Caution: The setting baud rate and data format of the host machine should keep the same as those of the inverter. Otherwise, the communication can't be proceeded successfully.
A8-02 Communication address
Range: 0 to 247, 0 is broadcast address Default: 1
When the local address is set as 0, thus it's broadcast address that can realize the function of
host machine broadcast.
Caution: The local address is unique except broadcast, and it's the basic condition to realize
point to point communication between host machine and inverter.
A8-03 Response delay
Range: 0ms to 30ms
Default: 2ms
Response delay means the interval time from the inverter end time of receiving data to start
time of sending data to the host machine. If the response delay is less than the system processing
time, then the response delay subjects to the time delay of the system processing time. If the
response delay is more than the system processing time, after the system processes the data, it
should be delayed to wait until the response delay time is up, then sending data to host machine.
A8-04 Communication timeout Range: 0.0s to 30.0s
Default: 0.0s
When the function is set as 0.0 s, the communication overtime parameter is invalid. When the
function is set as non-zero, if the internal time from one communication to next communication
exceeds the communication timeout, the system will alarm communication fault (Err27). So
generally it will be set invalid. If set the parameter in the continuous communication system, you
can monitor the communication status.
A8-05 Communication data format selection
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
0: Standard Modbus protocol
1: The returned byte from the slave machine is one byte more than the standard Modbus
protocol. Please refer to appendix A protocol description.
5.10 Group A9 Fault and Protection
A9-00 Motor overload protection selection.
Range: 0~1
Default: 1
0: The inverter doesn't have overload protection function for the motor, and the motor has the
115
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
risk of overheat damage. So it's suggested to change the heat relay between the inverter and the motor.
1: The inverter has overload protection function for the motor, and for the relationship of protection time and motor current please refer to Fig.5-20.
A9-01 Motor overload protection gain.
Range: 0.20 to 10.00 Default: 1.00
In order to have valid protection for overloads of different motors, it need to set A9-01
properly and for method refers to overload protection curve as in Fig 5-20. In the figure L1
represent the relationship of motor protection time and motor current when A9-01=1. When the
user need to change a certain current protection time, just need to change A9-01. The relationship
as below:
The required protection time T = A9-01× TL1
For example: The user need to change the protection time of 150% rated current to3 minutes.
Firstly find out the corresponding protection time of 150% is 6 minutes from fig.5-20, so A9-01= the required protection time T÷TL1= 3minute÷6minutes =0.5.
The maximum time of overload protection is 100 minutes, while the minimum load time is
0.1 minute. The users can adjust it according to the actual need.
When the motor has overload, it will alarm Err14 to avoid damage caused by continuous
overheat.
Note: There is no overload protection in default under 110% rated current. If it's needed to
realize protection function of under 110% current, please properly set the overcurrent protection
coefficient A9-35.
Current percentage=(actual current÷rated current)×A9-35
For example: The user need to change the protection time of 90% rated current to30.0 minutes.
Firstly find out the corresponding current percentage of 30min is 130% from fig.5-20, A9-35=
(130%÷90%)×100% = 144%. Pay attention that the maximum current protection percentage is
55%.
10 .0mi
Tmax
8 .0mi
L0
F9-01<1
3 .0mi
L1
F9-01=1
8.0mi
L2
F9-01>1
6.0mi
3.0mi
2.5mi
2.0mi
1.5mi
1mi 0.8mi 0.5mi 0.1mi
11 %
12 %
13 %
14 %
15 %
16 %
17 %
18 %
19 %
20 %
21 %
22 %
23 %
24 %
Tmin
25 %
Motor current percentage
Fig.5-21 Motor overload protection curve 116
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
A9-02 Motor overload warning coefficient.
Range: 50% to 100% Default: 80%
This function is used to give the system a warning signal before overload protection, so as to
have a pre-protection to the motor. The bigger the value, the shorter the reserved time.
When the inverter output current accumulate until it's larger than the product between the set
overload protection time and A9-02, the multi-function digital output terminal choose "motor
overload warning ON" switch signal.refer to explication(A6-00~A6-02) for setting function code
when terminal function is 6.
A9-03 Over-voltage stall gain
Range: 0 to 100
Default: 30
Range: 200.0V to A9-04 Over-voltage stall protective voltage
800.0V
Default: 760.0V<1>
<1> This value is 380V class default value, and 200V class corresponds to 380V default.
On the deceleration process, when the DC bus voltage is bigger than over-voltage protection
voltage, the inverter will stop decelerating and keep still in present frequency, waiting until the bus
voltage falling and then continue to decelerate.
Over-voltage stall gain is used to adjust the over-voltage restraining ability on decelerating
process. The bigger the value, the stronger the over-voltage restraining. it's better to set this value
as small as possible when there is no over-voltage.
For the load with small inertial, it's better to set the over-voltage stall a small value, otherwise
it's easily to slow down the dynamic respond speed. For the load with large inertial, it's better to
set the over-voltage stall a large value, otherwise the effect is not good so as to cause over-voltage
fault.
When the over-voltage stall gain is set as 0, this function is cancelled.
A9-05 V/F over-current stall gain
Range: 0 to 100
Default: 20
A9-06 V/F over-current stall protective current
Range: 100% to 200% Default: 150%
VF weak magnetic current stall A9-07
protection coefficient.
Range: 50% to 200% Default: 100%
Over-current stall means when the output current reaches the setting over-current stall
protection current (A9-06), the inverter stop accelerating on the acceleration process; decreasing
the output frequency on constant speed running process; slow down the decelerating speed until
the current less than over-current protection current (A9-06). For details please refer to fig.5-21.
Over-current stall protection current means the standard value for selecting over-current stall
function. The inverter starts to conduct over-current stall protection function when the current
exceeds this value. This value is a percentage that corresponding to rated current.
Over-current stall gain is used to adjust the ability of restraining the over-current. The bigger
the value, the stronger the restraining ability. It's better to set the value as small as possible on the
premise that there is no over-current.
For the load with small inertial, it's better to set the over-current stall gain a small value,
otherwise it's easily to slow down the dynamic respond speed. For the load with large inertial, it's
better to set the over-current stall gain a large value, otherwise the effect is not good so as to cause
over-current fault. On the occasions that the inertial is very small, it's suggested to set the value
less than 20.
117
Parameter Description
When over-current stall gain is set as 0, this function is cancelled.
Output current Over-current stall protection current
OD9L User Manual
t Output frequency
Set frequency
t Acceleration process Constant speed Decelerate process
Fig.5-22 Over-current stall protection illustration
Over-voltage stalling allowed to rise A9-08
limit value
Range: 0.0% to 100.0% Default: 10.0%
It means the maximum frequency adjust value on over-voltage stall. Generally there is no
need to modify.
A9-11 Fault auto reset times
Range: 0 to 20
Default: 0
Fault relay action selection during A9-12
fault auto reset
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
On the period after choosing inverter fault auto reset function, setting this parameter can
decided whether the fault relay need to do action, so as to shielding the alarm and keep the
machine running continuously.
A9-13 Time interval of fault auto reset
Range: 0.1s to 100.0s
It represent the waiting time from fault alarm to automatic reset.
Default: 1.0s
A9-14 Input phase loss protection selection Range: 0~1 0: Prohibit 1: Enable, the fault code is Err23 when there is input phase loss.
Default: 1
Output phase loss protection A9-15 selection
0: prohibit
Range: 0~1 118
Default: 1
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
1: Enable, the fault code is Err24 when there is output phase loss.
Short-circuit to ground upon A9-16
power-on
Range: 0~1
Default: 1
0: prohibit
1: Enable, allow the inverter check if there is short circuit to ground. The fault code is Err20
if such fault happens.
A9-17 Under-voltage fault auto reset selection
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
0: manual reset. After the under-voltage fault, though the bus voltage has recovered to normal,
the fault is still existed. So it need manual reset for the under-voltage fault Err12.
1: automatic reset. After the under-voltage fault, the inverter follows the present bus voltage
to clear the fault Err 12.
Over-voltage inhibition mode A9-18 selection
Range: 0~2
Default: 1
0: invalid
1: Over-voltage inhibition mode 1. It's mainly used for avoiding overvoltage fault when
bus voltage rising by energy feedback on deceleration process.
2: Over-voltage inhibition mode 1. It's mainly used on the occasions when bus voltage
rising by load energy feedback on constant speed process which is caused by load centre
skewing from the physical centre.
A9-19 Flux brake effective state selection
Range: 0~2
Default: 2
0: invalid
1: valid on either constant speed or deceleration process.
2: only valid on deceleration process.
It's mainly used on the occasions which need fast stop. Flux brake makes the feedback energy
caused by deceleration to consume on the motor, thus avoid the over-voltage fault. The restraining
power can be adjusted by flux brake gain A3-10 (VF). When using brake resistance as
over-voltage suppressor, please set A9-19 as 0 (invalid), otherwise it may have problem in
deceleration process.
A9-20 Threshold of over-voltage inhibition mode 2
Range: 1.0% to 150.0% Default: 100.0%
It means the adjustable limit value when over-voltage inhibition mode takes effective. The
less the value, the less the rising amplitude of the bus voltage, so the deceleration time is much
longer.
A9-22 Fault protection action selection 1
Range: 0~22202
Every setting digit has the same meaning as the unit digit.
Unit's place: motor overload Err14
0: free stop
1: stop according to stop mode
Default: 0
119
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
2: keep running Ten's digit: reserved Hundred's place: input phase loss Err23 Thousand's place: output phase loss Err24 Myriabit's place: Parameters read and write problem Err25
A9-23 Fault protection action selection 2
Range: 0~22222
Default: 0
For meaning of every digit of fault protection action selection 2 please refer to fault
protection action selection 1.
Unit's place: communication fault Err27
0: free stop
1: stop according to stop mode
2: keep running
Ten's digit: exterior fault Err28
Hundred's place: too large speed deviation fault Err29
Thousand's place: user defined fault 1 Err30
Myriabit's place: user defined fault 2 Err31
A9-24 Fault protection action selection 3
Range: 0~22022
Default: 0
For meaning of every digit of fault protection action selection 3 please refer to fault
protection action selection 1.
Unit's place: PID feedback loss on running Err32
0: free stop
1: stop according to stop mode
2: keep running
Ten's digit: off load fault Err34
Hundred's place: reserved
Thousand's place: present continuous running time arrival Err39
Myriabit's place: accumulated running time arrival Err40
Caution: For fault protection action selection 1 ~ Fault protection action selection 3, when
choosing "free stop", the inverter will display Err** then stop directly.
When choosing "stop according to stop mode", the inverter will display Ala**, then stop
according to stop mode. After stop it displays "Err**".
When choosing "keep running", the inverter will keep running and displays Ala**, and the
running frequency is set by A9-26.
Frequency selection for continuing to
A9-26 run upon fault
Range: 0~4
0: Running with present running frequency
1: Running with the set frequency
2: Running with the upper limit frequency
3: Running with the lower limit frequency
4: Running with the standby frequency value A9-27
Default: 1
120
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
A9-27 Backup frequency upon abnormality
Range: 0.0% to 100.0%
Default: 100.0%
This value is the percentage corresponding to the maximum frequency, taking effective when
A9-26 chooses abnormal standby frequency and problem happened.
A9-28 Protection upon load becoming 0
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
A9-29 Detection level of load becoming 0
Range: 0.0% to 80.0% Default: 20.0%
A9-30 Detection time of load becoming 0
Range: 0.0s to 100.0s Default: 5.0s
When off load protection is A9-28, if the output current is less than the off load detected
value (9-29* rated current) set by A9-29, and the lasting time is more than the off load detected
time, the inverter will output off load fault Err34. It also can choose the action status after off load
by A9-24.
A9-31 Detection value of too large speed deviation
Range: 0.0% to 100.0% Default: 20.0%
Detection time of too large speed A9-32
deviation
Range: 0.0s to 100.0s Default: 0.0s
This function only takes effective on vector but not torque mode. 100% of A9-31 corresponds
the maximum frequency A0-14.
When the inverter has detected the deviation between the actual speed and setting speed,
speed deviation is larger than the too large speed deviation A9-31, and the lasting time is longer
than detection time of too large speed deviation A9-32, the inverter will conduct Err29. Meanwhile
it can use A9-23 to define the action status after the fault.
When the tool large speed deviation time is 0.0s, the too large speed protection is invalid.
A9-33 Over-speed detection value
Range: 0.0% to 100.0%
Default: 20.0%
A9-34 Over-speed detection time
Range: 0.0s to 100.0s
Default: 2.0s
This function is valid only on vector but not torque control mode. 100% of A9-34
corresponds the maximum frequency A0-14.
When the inverter has detected that the actual speed exceeds the maximum speed, and the
excess value is larger than the over-speed detection value A9-33, and the lasting time is longer
than the over-speed detection time A9-34, the inverter will conduct Err43.
When over-speed detection time is 0.0s, the over-speed protection is invalid.
A9-35 Motor overload protection current coefficient
Range: 100% to 200%
Default: 100%
This parameter is used to realize the over load protection on 110% rated current, and it needs
to combine A9-00~A9-02 to use.
5.11 Group AA PID Function
PID control is a general method of process control. It adjusts the output frequency through proportional, integral and differential calculations of the difference between the feedback signal of the controlled quantity and the signal of the target quantity, and constitutes the closed-loop system so as to stabilize the controlled quantity at the target quality. It is applicable to such process control
121
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
occasions with flow control, pressure control and temperature control. The basic principle framework of control is shown as follows:
11 Ti S
Reference Ref +
quantity
-
Td *S + 1
P
Deviation Out limit
Fdb
1
Feedback quantity
Fig.5-23 Process PID principle schematic diagram
AA-00 PID giving source
Range: 0~5
Default: 0
0: AA-01 setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: Communication giving
4: Pulse giving
5: Multi-segment command
When the frequency source selects PID, i.e. A0-06 or A0-07=6, this group of function isvalid.
This parameter decides the target quantity reference channel of the process PID.
The setup target quantity of the process PID is a relative value, and the setting range is 0~100%.
The PID range (AA-05) is not necessary because the system will always calculate according
to the relative value (0 to 100%) no matter how the range is set. However, if PID range is set, it can
view the actual values relative to the reference and feedback of PID via the display parameters on the
keyboard.
AA-01 PID digital giving
Range: 0.0% to 100.0%
Default: 50.0%
When AA-00=0 is selected, the target source is keyboard giving. It needs to set this parameter.
AA-02 PID giving change time
Range: 0.00s to 650.00s
Default: 0.00s
PID giving changing time means the required time of PID changes from 0.0% to 100.0%.
When PID has changes, the actual value given by PID will not follow PID to change
immediately, but to have lenear change according to the giving time.
AA-03 PID feedback source 0: AI1 1: AI2 2: AI1~AI2 3: Communication giving 4: PULSE giving 5: AI1+AI2 6: MAX(|AI1|,|AI2|)
Range: 0~7 122
Default: 0
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
7: MIN(|AI1|,|AI2|) This parameter is used to choose process PID feedback signal channel. Feedback value of process PID is also a relative value, the setting range is 0.0% ~ 100.0%.
AA-04 PID action direction
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
0: Positive effect, when PID feedback signal is less than the giving value, the inverter output
frequency will rise. The winding tension control is a example.
1: Negative effect, when PID feedback value is less than the giving value, the inverter output
frequency will decrease. The unwinding tension control is a example.
Pay attention that this function is effected by multi-function terminal PID taking opposite
direction.
AA-05 PID feedback range giving
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 1000
PID giving feedback value is dimensionless unit, it used for displaying U1-10 of PID giving
and U1-11 of PID feedback.
The relative value of PID feedback is 100.0%, corresponding to giving feedback range AA-05.
For example, if set AA-05 as 4000, thus when PID gives 60.0%, PID giving display 2400 for
U1-10.
AA-06 Proportional gain Kp1
Range: 0.0 to 100.0
Default: 20.0
AA-07 Integral time Ti1
Range: 0.01s to 10.00s
Default: 2.00s
AA-08 Differential time Td1
Range: 0.000s to 10.000s Default: 0.000s
Proportional gain Kp1:
It decides the adjustment intensity of the whole PID regulator. The larger the Kp1, the stronger
the adjustment intensity. Value 100.0 of this parameter indicates when the deviation between the PID
feedback and the giving value is 100%, the adjustment amplitude of the PID regulator on the output
frequency command is maximum frequency.
Integral time Ti1:
It decides the integral adjustment intensity of the PID regulator. The shorter the integral time,
the stronger the adjust intensity. Integration time is the time within which the integration regulator
performs continuous adjustment and the adjustment quantity reaches maximum frequency when the
deviation between the PID feedback and the giving value is 100%.
Differential time Td1:
It decides the PID regulator intensity deviation changing rate. The longer the differential time,
the stronger the adjusting intensity. Differential time is the time within which if the feedback
quantity changes 100%, the adjustment quantity reaches maximum frequency.
AA-09
Cut-off frequency of PID reverse rotation
Range: Default: 0.00Hz
0.00Hz~max- frequency
On some conditions, only when the PID output frequency is minus (means reverse running),
can PID control the giving value and feedback value to the same status. But it's not allowed to use
too large reverse frequency on some certain occasions, so AA-09 is used to define the upper limit
of the reverse frequency.
123
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
AA-10 Deviation limit
Range: 0.0% to 100.0%
Default: 0.0%
When the deviation between PID giving value and feedback value is less than AA-10, PID
stops adjusting. In this way, the output frequency keeps unchanged when the deviation between
PID giving and feedback is small. It's effective in some closed loop control occasions.
AA-11 Differential limit
Range: 0.00% to 100.00% Default: 0.10%
In PID regulator, differential effect is sensitive and it's easily to cause system oscillation. So
generally PID differential is limited in a small range and AA-11 is used to define the output range
of PID differential.
AA-12 PID feedback filter time
Range: 0.00s to 60.00s
Default: 0.00s
AA-12 is used to filter the PID feedback value. This kind of filtering is useful to decrease the
distraction influence for the feedback value but will bring the respond character of closed-loop
system.
AA-13 Detection value of PID feedback loss
Range: 0.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0s
AA-14 Detection time of PID feedback loss Range: 0.0s to 3600.0s Default: 3600.0s
This function is used to judge if PID feedback is lost. When the PID feedback value is less
than the detection value of PID feedback loss AA-13, and the lasting time is longer than the
detection time of PID feedback loss AA-14, the inverter conduct protection according to unit's
digit selection of A9-24, then conducts fault ERR32 and alarm ALA32.
AA-18 Proportional gain Kip2
Range: 0.0 to 100.0
Default: 20.0
AA-19 Integral time Ti2
Range: 0.01s to 10.00s Default: 2.00s
AA-20 Differential time Td2
Range: 0.000s to 10.000s Default: 0.000s
PID parameter switchover AA-21 condition
Range: 0~2
Default: 0
AA-22 PID parameter switchover deviation Range: 0.0% to AA-23 1
Default: 20.0%
PID parameter switchover deviation
AA-23
Range: AA-22 to 100.0% Default: 80.0%
2
On some certain application occasions, one group of PID parameter can't meet the need of
the whole system, so different PID parameters are needed to used on different occasions.
AA-21 is the switching condition of PID parameter, similar to AA-06~AA-08.
AA-21=0: No switchover, use the first group of PID parameters.
AA-21=0: DI terminal switchover. Multi-function terminal function must be set as 43 (PID
parameter switch terminal), when this terminal is invalid, it chooses parameter group 1
(AA-6~AA-8); when this terminal is valid, it chooses parameter group 2 (AA-18~AA-20).
AA-21=2: Automatic switchover according to deviation. When the absolute deviation
between the giving value and the feedback value is less than PID parameter switch deviation 1
(AA-22), PID parameter chooses parameter group 1. When the absolute deviation between the
giving value and the feedback value is more than PID parameter switch deviation 2 (AA-23), PID
parameter chooses parameter group 2. When the deviation between the giving value and feedback
124
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
value is in the range from deviation 1 to deviation 2, PID parameter is the Linear interpolation value of the two PID parameter lines. Please refer to fig.5-23.
PID parameter
PID parameter 1
AA-06,
AA-07,
PID parameter 2
AA-18,
AA-19,
AA-22
AA-23
PID deviation
Fig.5-24 PID parameter switching
AA-24 PID parameter switchover deviation Range: 0.0% to 100.0% 2
Default: 0.0%
PID parameter switchover deviation
AA-25 2
Range: 0.00s to 650.00s Default: 0.00%
The PID output is fixed as the initial value AA-24 when the inverter starts. After keeping the
initial value for time AA-25, PID starts the closed-loop adjustment calculation. Fig.5-24 illustrates
the PID initial value function.
Output frequency
AA-25
AA-24
Time
Fig.5-25 PID initial value function illustration
AA-26 AA-27
Maximum deviation between two PID outputs in forward direction Maximum deviation between two PID outputs in reverse direction
Range: 0.00% to 100.00% Range: 0.00% to 100.00%
Default: 1.00% Default: 1.00%
This function is used to limit the difference value between two outputs of PID, so as to restrain the PID output to change too fast, thus the inverter can run steadily.
AA-28 PID integral property Unit's digit: integral separation selection 0: Invalid 1: Valid
Range: 00~11
Default: 00
125
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
If the set integral separation is valid, when multi-function digital DI integral pause (function 38) is valid, PID integral stops calculation and only the proportion and differential of PID is valid.
when the set integral separation is invalid, whether multi-function digital DI is valid or not, integral separation is invalid.
Ten's digit: whether to stop the integral when output value reaches the limit. 0: Continue the integral 1: Stop the integral When PID output reaches the maximum value or minimum value, it can choose whether to stop integral function or not. If choose stop integral, the PID calculation stops. It can decrease the overshoot of PID.
AA-29 PID operation at stop 0: PID doesn't calculate on stop status. 1: PID calculates on stop status.
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
5.12 Group Ab Swing Frequency and Fixed Length Count
The swing frequency function is applicable to the textile and chemical fiber fields and the applications where traversing and winding functions are required.
Swing frequency function means that the output frequency of the inverter swings up and down with the setup frequency around the center. The trace of running frequency at the time axis is shown in the figure below, of which the swing amplitude is set by Ab-00 and Ab-01. When AB-01 is set 0, the swing amplitude is 0, so the swing frequency is ineffective at the moment.
Setting Frequency Hz
Frequency
Upper Limit FH
Center Frequency Fset
Frequency
Lower Limit FL
+Aw -Aw
Running Command
Stop Command
Accelerate by Acceleration
Time
Aw=Fset*AB-01
Textile Kick Frequency =Aw*AB-02
Triangular Rising Time =AB-03 * AB-04
Frequency CycleAB-03
Decelerate by Deceleration Time
Fig.5-26 Swing Frequency Working Diagram
Ab-00 Swing frequency setting mode
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
This parameter is used to decides the standard value of the amplitude.
0: Relative center frequency (A6-06 frequency source), and it's amplitude changing system.
The amplitude is changing with the center frequency (set frequency).
1: Relative maximum frequency (A0-14), and it's fixed amplitude system, that means the
amplitude will not change all the time.
Ab-01 Swing frequency amplitude
Range: 0.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
Ab-02 Jump frequency amplitude
Range: 0.0% to 50.0%
Default: 0.0%
This parameter is used to determine the values of swing amplitude and jump frequency.
When setting the amplitude which is relative to center frequency (Ab-00=0), amplitude
126
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
AW=frequency source A0-07×swing amplitude Ab-01. When setting the amplitude which is relative to maximum frequency (Ab-00=1), AW=frequency source A0-14×swing amplitude Ab-01. When it running in swing frequency, jump frequency amplitude is equivalent to the frequency percentage of the jump frequency relative to swing amplitude, thus jump frequency=amplitude AW ×jump frequency amplitude Ab-02. If choosing swing amplitude is relative to center frequency (Ab-00=0), jump amplitude is a changing value. If choosing swing amplitude is relative to maximum frequency (Ab-00=1), jump frequency is a fixed value.
Swing frequency is limited by the frequency upper limit and frequency lower limit.
Ab-03 Swing frequency cycle
Range: 0.1s to 3000.0s Default: 10.0s
Triangular wave rising time Ab-04 coefficient
Range: 0.1% to 100.0% Default: 50.0%
Swing frequency cycle: It refers to the time of a complete cycle of swing frequency.
Triangular wave rising time coefficient Ab-04, is the percentage of triangular wave rising
time which relative to swing frequency cycle.
Triangular wave rising time= swing frequency cycle Ab-03×Triangular wave rising time
coefficient Ab-04 (unit: s).
Triangular wave falling time =swing frequency cycle Ab-03 × (1-time constant of triangular
wave boost Ab-04 (unit: s)
Ab-05 Set length
Range: 0m to 65535m Default: 1000m
Ab-06 Actual length
Range: 0m to 65535m Default: 0m
Ab-07 Pulse number per meter
Range: 0.1 to 6553.5
Default: 100.0
The above function codes are used for fixed length control.
Length information is collected by multi-function digital input terminals. The collected pulse
quantity divides by pulse number per meter Ab-07, the result can be the actual length Ab-06. When
the actual length is greater or equal to the set length Ab-05, multi-function digital terminal output
"length reached" ON signal.
During the fixed length control process, it can conduct the length reset action (DI function
select 31) by multi-function terminals. For details please refer to setting of A5-00~A5-04.
It needs to set the relevant terminal as "length count input" (DI function select 31), and must
use HDI ports when the frequency is high.
Ab-08 Set count value
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 1000
Ab-09 Designated count value
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 1000
The count value need to be collected by multi-function digital input terminals. It need to set
the relevant input terminals to "counter input" (function 28) and must use DI5 port when the
frequency is high.
When the count value reaches the set count value Ab-08, multi-function digital terminal
output "set count value reached" ON signal.
When the count value reaches the specified count value Ab-09, multi-function digital terminal
output "specified count value reached" ON signal.
The specified count valueAb-09 should not greater than the set count value Ab-08. For more
details please refer to Fig.5-27.
127
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Count pulse DI5
Set count value Y1 Specified count relay
Fig.5-27 Set count value giving and specified count value giving illustration
5.13 Group AC Multi-segment Command and Simple PLC Function
Simply PLC function is a built-in PLC for automatic control of the multi-segment logic. It can set the running time, direction and frequency to satisfy the production need.
OD9L series of smart inverter can implement 16-segment variable control,and has four types of acceleration/deceleration time for selection
When the setup PLC completes one cycle, it can output one ON signal through the multi-function output terminal Y1 and multi-function RELAY1. All the details shown as A6-00 A6-02
AC-00 Multi-segment command 0
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-01 Multi-segment command 1
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-02 Multi-segment command 2
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-03 Multi-segment command 3
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-04 Multi-segment command 4
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-05 Multi-segment command 5
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-06 Multi-segment command 6
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-07 Multi-segment command 7
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-08 Multi-segment command 8
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-09 Multi-segment command 9
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-10 Multi-segment command 10
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-11 Multi-segment command 11
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-12 Multi-segment command 12
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-13 Multi-segment command 13
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-14 Multi-segment command 14
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AC-15 Multi-segment command 15
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
When frequency source chooses A0-06, A0-07 ,A0-10as multi-segment speed mode, it need
to set AC-00~AC-15 to fix the characters.
Note: Symbol of AC-00~ AC-15 decides the direction of simple PLC. Negative symbol
means running in reverse. Please refer to below diagram.
128
OD9L User Manual
AC-19 define acceleration time AC-00
AC-21 define deceleration time
AC-02
Parameter Description
AC-14
AC-15
AC-21 define acceleration time
AC-18
AC-01 AC-20
AC-23 define deceleration time
Y1 or RELAY output
Fig.5-28 simple PLC illustration
AC-16 Simple PLC running mode
Range: 0~2
Default: 0
Simple PLC has two functions: Act as frequency source or VF separation voltage.
Fig.5-29 is the illustration that simple PLC acts as frequency source with which the symbol of
AC-00~AC-15 decide the running direction, the inverter runs in reverse if it's negative symbol.
AC-19 define acceleration time
Simple PLC running
AC-02
AC-14 AC-15
AC-21 define acceleration time
AC-18
AC-01 AC-20
AC-23 define deceleration time
DO or RELAY index
Fig.5-29 Simple PLC illustration When it used as frequency source, PLC has three kinds of running ways. 0: Stop after running in single time. The inverter stops automatically after finishing a single cycle, and need running command to restart it. 1: Keep the final value after the single running end. After the inverter finishing a single circle, keep the final frequency and direction of the last period of running automatically. 2: Keep running gall the time. After the inverter finishing one cycle, it will start another cycle automatically until stop command put in.
AC-17 Simple PLC retentive selection
Range: 0~3
Default: 0
This function defines the power off memory way at stop on PLC running process.
0: No memory on both power-off and stop.
1: With memory on power-off but no memory on stop.
129
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
2: No memory on power-off but with memory on stop. 3: With memory on both power-off and stop. PLC power-off memory means memorizing the running stage and frequency on PLC process before power-off. The next time to have power on, it continues running from the memory stage. If choose no memory, it will start the PLC process from the beginning every time power on to start. PLC stop memory means memorizing the running stage and frequency on PLC process before stop. The next time to restart, it continues running from the memory stage. If choose no memory, it will start the PLC process from the beginning every time restart it.
AC-18 AC-19 AC-20 AC-21 AC-22 AC-23 AC-24 AC-25 AC-26 AC-27 AC-28 AC-29 AC-30 AC-31 AC-32 AC-33 AC-34 AC-35 AC-36 AC-37 AC-38 AC-39
Running time of simple PLC reference 0 Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 0 Running time of simple PLC reference 1 Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 1 Running time of simple PLC reference 2 Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 2 Running time of simple PLC reference 3 Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 3 Running time of simple PLC reference 4 Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 4 Running time of simple PLC reference 5 Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 5 Running time of simple PLC reference 6 Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 6 Running time of simple PLC reference 7 Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 7 Running time of simple PLC reference 8 Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 8 Running time of simple PLC reference 9 Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 9 Running time of simple PLC reference 10 Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 10
Range: 0.0~6500.0 Range: 0~3 Range: 0.0~6500.0 Range: 0~3 Range: 0.0~6500.0 Range: 0~3 Range: 0.0~6500.0 Range: 0~3 Range: 0.0~6500.0 Range: 0~3 Range: 0.0~6500.0 Range: 0~3 Range: 0.0~6500.0 Range: 0~3 Range: 0.0~6500.0 Range: 0~3 Range: 0.0~6500.0 Range: 0~3 Range: 0.0~6500.0 Range: 0~3 Range: 0.0~6500.0 Range: 0~3
Default: 0.0 Default: 0 Default: 0.0 Default: 0 Default: 0.0 Default: 0 Default: 0.0 Default: 0 Default: 0.0 Default: 0 Default: 0.0 Default: 0 Default: 0.0 Default: 0 Default: 0.0 Default: 0 Default: 0.0 Default: 0 Default: 0.0 Default: 0 Default: 0.0 Default: 0
130
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
AC-40 Running time of simple PLC reference 11
Range: 0.0~6500.0 Default: 0.0
AC-41 Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 11
Range: 0~3
Default: 0
AC-42 Running time of simple PLC reference 12
Range: 0.0~6500.0 Default: 0.0
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple AC-43
PLC reference 12
Range: 0~3
Default: 0
AC-44 Running time of simple PLC reference 13
Range: 0.0~6500.0 Default: 0.0
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple AC-45
PLC reference 13
Range: 0~3
Default: 0
AC-46 Running time of simple PLC reference 14
Range: 0.0~6500.0 Default: 0.0
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple AC-47 PLC reference 14
Range: 0~3
Default: 0
AC-48 Running time of simple PLC reference 15
Range: 0.0~6500.0 Default: 0.0
AC-49 Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 15
Range: 0~3
Default: 0
AC-50 Time unit of simple PLC
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
They are used to define every running time and acceleration/ deceleration selection. Among
them acceleration/ deceleration selection 0~3 respectively represent acceleration/ deceleration time
0: A0-23, A0-24; acceleration/ deceleration time 1: A7-03, A7-04; acceleration/ deceleration time 2:
A7-05, A7-06; acceleration/ deceleration time 3: A7-07, A7-08.
AC-50 defined the running time unit of every PLC.
0: Second
1: Hour
AC-51 MS priority selection
Range: 0~1
Default: 1
Multi speed priority means when not all the multi speed terminal is 0, give priority to conduct
the multi speed command value.
0: No multi speed priority
1: Multi speed priority
AC-52 Acceleration/deceleration time of multi-segment speed
Range: 0~3
Default: 0
Under the circumstance of multi speed priority, conduct acceleration/ deceleration selection.
0~3 respectively represent acceleration/ deceleration1~4.
AC-53 AC - 00 - AC - 15 units selection of multi-segment speed
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
It is used to select the units of AC - 00 - AC - 15 multi-segment speed, in order to meet the
needs of different occasions to multistage speed frequency unit
0:%
1:Hz
AC-55 Multi-segment command 0 giving
Range: 0~5
Default: 0
This parameter decides the giving channels of multi command. Multi command 0 not only
can choose AC-00, but also can choose many other options for the convenience to switch between
131
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
multi command and other giving ways. When multi command or simple PLC acts as frequency source, both of them can switch between two kinds of frequency source.
0: Function code AC-00 giving 1: AI1 giving 2: AI2 giving 3: PULSE 4: PID 5: Preset frequency giving (A0-11), UP/DOWN revisable.
5.14 Group Ad Torque Control Parameter
Only when A0-3 is vector control can it conduct torque control, thus control the motor output
torque by torque command. Pay attention to below items when using torque control:
Torque control take effect
If it's needed to make torque control take effect, please set Ad-10 to 1, or set multi-function
DI terminal function to 44. Besides, it also can realize torque control prohibited (function 32)
through multi-function digital DI terminals. When torque prohibited function is effective, the
inverter is fixed with speed control mode.
Torque command and speed limitation setting
Torque control can be set by Ad-00 and Ad-01, when torque source is non-digital setting,
100% input corresponds to Ad-01 value.
Speed limitation can be set by Ad-03 and Ad-04, or through upper limit frequency A0-15,
A0-16 and A0-17.
Torque command direction setting
When it's torque control, torque command is relevant to running command and torque value
like below form:
Running command
Input torque value
Torque command direction
Forward
> 0
Forward direction
Forward
< 0
Reverse direction
Reverse
> 0
Reverse direction
Reverse
< 0
Forward direction
Switchover between speed and torque mode When multi function digital DI terminal set the switchover (function 44) between speed control/ torque control, when the corresponding terminal function is effective, control mode is equivalent to Ad-10 value opposite; on the contrary control mode is determined by Ad-10.
Ad-00 Torque command source selection
Range: 0~6
Default: 0
Ad-00 is used to set the torque source, totally have 7 kinds of setting mode.
0: Digital setting (Ad-01), target torque use Ad-01 setting value directly.
1: AI1
2: AI2
Target torque is determined by analog value. OD9L control board has 2 analog input terminals
(AI1,AI2). AI1 is 0V~10V voltage type input; AI2 can be 0V~10V voltage type input, or
132
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
0mA~20mA current input, which in selected by the switch on control board. Relationship curve of AI1, AI2 input voltage and target torque can be selected by A5-45.
OD9L has 4 groups of corresponding curve, in which 2 groups are two-point straight lines, 2 groups are four-point arbitrary curves. Users can set them by function code A5-15~A5-23 and group AE function code. Function code A5-45 is used to set AI1~AI2 analog input, respectively choosing two groups of curves of the 4 curves group.
When AI is used for torque giving, 100.0% of voltage/ current input setting, means the percentage correspond torque digital setting Ad-01.
3: Communication giving It means target torque is given by communication mode. The data is given by upper machine communication address 0x1000, data format is -100.00%~100.00%, 100.00% means the percentage corresponds to Ad-01. 4. PULSE (HDI) Target torque is given by terminal HDI high speed pulse. Pulse giving signal specification: voltage range 9V~30V, frequency range 0kHz~ 50kHz. Pulse giving can only be input by HDI terminal. HDI terminal input pulse frequency and the setting relationship can be set by A5-30~ A5-34, this relationship is two-point straight line. 100.0% of pulse input means the percentage correspond to torque digital setting Ad-01. 5. MIN (AI1,AI2) It means the target torque is given by the minimum value between AI1 and AI2. 6: MAX (AI1,AI2) It means the target torque is given by the maximum value between AI1 and AI2. The full range of 1~6 corresponds to Ad-01.
Ad-01 Torque digital giving
Range: -200.0% to 200.0% Default: 150.0%
Torque setting uses relative value, 100.0% corresponds to motor rated torque. Setting range
-200% ~ 200%, means that the maximum torque of inverter is equivalent to 2 times of rated torque.
When motor power is more than inverter power, it will be limited in the maximum torque.
Forward maximum frequency of Ad-03 torque control
Range: 0.00Hz ~ A0-14
Default: 50.00Hz
Reverse maximum frequency of Ad-04
torque control
Range: 0.00Hz ~ A0-14
Default: 50.00Hz
They are used to set the forward or reverse maximum running frequency on the torque control
mode.
On the torque control mode, the motor rotation speed will continuously rising if the load
torque is less than the motor output torque. In order to avoid accident like galloping, it must limit
the maximum speed of the motor.
Ad-06 Torque setting filter time
Range: 0.00s to 10.00s
Default: 0.00s
Setting this parameter can get a smoother and more gentle torque command, but the respond
will be slower.
133
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
Ad-07 Acceleration time in torque control Range: 0.0s to 1000.0s
Default: 10.0s
Ad-08 Deceleration time in torque control Range: 0.0s to 1000.0s
Default: 10.0s
This parameter is used to set the acceleration/ deceleration time of the maximum frequency to
decrease the start impact when setting torque control.
Ad-10 Speed/Torque control selection 0: Speed mode 1: Torque mode
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
5.15 Group AE AI Multi-point Curve Setting
AE-00 AI curve 1 minimum input
Range: -10.00V to AE-02 Default: 0.00V
Corresponding setting of AI AE-01 curve 1 minimum input
Range:- 100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AE-02 AI curve 1 inflexion 1 input
Range: AE-00 to AE-04
Default: 3.00V
Corresponding setting of AI AE-03 curve 1 inflexion 1 input
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 30.0%
AE-04 AI curve 1 inflexion 2 input
Range: AE-02to AE-06
Default: 6.00V
AE-05 Corresponding setting of AI curve 1 inflexion 2 input
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 60.0%
AE-06 AI curve 1 maximum input
Range: AE-06 to 10.00V
Default: 10.00V
Corresponding setting of AI AE-07
curve 1 maximum input
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 100.0%
AE-08 AI curve 2 minimum input
Range: -10.00V to AE-02 Default: 0.00V
Corresponding setting of AI AE-09
curve 2 minimum input
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 0.0%
AE-10 AI curve 2 inflexion 1 input
Range: AE-00 to AE-04
Default: 3.00V
Corresponding setting of AI AE-11 curve 2 inflexion 1 input
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 30.0%
AE-12 AI curve 2 inflexion 2 input
Range: AE-02to AE-06
Default: 6.00V
AE-13 Corresponding setting of AI curve 2 inflexion 2 input
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 60.0%
AE-14 AI curve 2 maximum input
Range: AE-06 to 10.00V
Default: 10.00V
AE-15 Corresponding setting of AI curve 2 maximum input
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Default: 100.0%
The above function code define the setting value relationship between analog input voltage
and analog input value. When analog input voltage exceeds the set maximum or minimum range,
the exceed part will be calculated as maximum or minimum value.
When analog input is current input, 1mA is equivalent to 0.5V.
Curve 1 and curve 2 are in accordance with analog value group A5 quantization. While group
A5 is quantified to straight line but group AE can be set to curve type, so it's more flexible for
analog to input multi-point curves. Please refer to below diagram.
134
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
Corresponding setting of analog input
100%
Corresponding setting of AI maximum input
Corresponding setting of AI maximum input
Corresponding setting of AI inflection point 1
Corresponding setting of AI inflection point 2
AI curve inflection 1
Corresponding setting of AI minimum input 100%
AI curve inflection 2
AI input voltage 10V (20mA)
Fig.5-30 Multi-point corresponding illustration
AE-24 AE-25 AE-24 AE-25
Jump point of AI1 setting Jump amplitude of AI1 setting Jump point of AI2 setting Jump amplitude of AI2 setting
Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Range: 0.0% to 100.0% Range: -100.0% to 100.0% Range: 0.0% to 100.0%
Default: 0.0% Default: 0.5% Default: 0.0% Default: 0.5%
Analog input AI1~AI2 of OD9L all have the value jump function. Jump function means when analog value changing around the jump point range, set the analog value as jump point value. Example: Voltage of analog input AI1 is fluctuated around 5V, the fluctuation range is 4.90V~ 5.10V, AI minimum input 0.00V corresponds to 0.0%, while maximum input 10.0V corresponds to 100.0%, so the detected AI1 corresponding setting is fluctuated between 49.0%~ 51.0%. If setting AI1 jump point AE-24 as 50.0%, setting AI1 jump amplitude AE-25 as 1.0%, AI1 has been transformed to a stable input and the fluctuation is eliminated.
5.16 Group FF Default Parameter
It's the factory set parameter group, users can't modify it.
5.17 Group C0 Second Motor Parameter Setting
When users need to switch between 2 motors, it can realize the function by C0-00 or NO.41 function of multi function digital DI terminal. Besides, the 2 motors can respectively set the nameplate parameter, motor tuning, VF control or vector control, and separately set the relevant parameters to VF control or vector control.
Three groups of function code (C1, C2, C3) respectively correspond to motor parameter, VF parameter setting, vector control parameters of the second motor. All the parameters of group H, both the definition and usage are same as those of the first motor, so users can refer to relevant parameters of motor 1.
C0-00 Motor selection 1: NO.1 motor
Range: 1~2
Default: 1
135
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
2: NO.2 motor If the present motor is NO.1 motor, C1~C3 function groups are invisible.
C0-01 Motor 2 control mode
Range: 1~2
1: Open loop vector control (speed sensorless vector control)
2: VF control
Default: 2
Motor 2 C0-02
acceleration/deceleration time
Range: 0~4
0: Same as the first motor
1: Acceleration/ deceleration time 1, A0-23, A0-24
2: Acceleration/ deceleration time 2, A7-03, A7-04
3: Acceleration/ deceleration time 2, A7-05, A7-06
4: Acceleration/ deceleration time 4, A7-07, A7-08
Default: 0
5.18 Group C1 Second Motor Parameter
This group of function code parameter description is same as groupA1.
C1-00 Auto-tuning selection 0: No function 1: Static tuning 2: Dynamic complete tuning
Range: 0~2
Default: 0
C1-01 C1-02 C1-03
Motor 2 rated power Motor 2 rated voltage Motor 2 poles number
C1-04 C1-05 C1-06
Motor 2 rated current Motor 2 rated frequency Motor 2 rated rotation speed
C1-07 Motor 2 no-load current
C1-08 Motor 2 stator resistance
C1-09 Motor 2 rotor resistance
C1-10 Motor 2 mutual inductive
C1-11 Motor 2 leakage inductive
Range: 0.4kW to 1000.0kW Range: 0V to 1500V Range: 2 to 64 Range: 0.1A~3000.0A Range: 0.00Hz to A0-14 Range: 0rpm to 60000rpm Range: 0.1A~1500.0A Range: 0.001to 65.535 Range: 0.001to 65.535 Range: 0.1mH to 6553.5mH Range: 0.01mH to 655.35mH
Default: Model dependent Default: 380V Default: Model dependent Default: Model dependent Default: 50.00Hz Default: Model dependent Default: Model dependent Default: Model dependent Default: Model dependent Default: Model dependent Default: Model dependent
136
OD9L User Manual
C1-12 C1-13
Acceleration time of complete auto-tuning Deceleration time of complete auto-tuning
Range: 1.0s to 600.0s Range: 1.0s to 600.0s
Parameter Description
Default: 10.0s Default: 10.0s
5.19 Group C2 Second Motor VF Curve Setting
This group of function code detail description is same as group A3. For the VF control codes that are not listed in this group, please use group A3 directly.
C2-00 Torque boost
Range: 0.0% ~ 30.0%
When this parameter is set to 0, it means torque boost automatically.
Default: 0.0%
C2-02 Oscillation suppression gain
Range: 0 to 100
Default: Model dependent
5.20 Group C3 Second Motor Vector Control Parameter
This group of parameters are similar to group A4, which is effective only on the second motor. For details description please refer to group A4.
C3-00 C3-02 C3-04
C3-05
C3-06
C3-07 C3-08 C3-11 C3-12 C3-13
C3-14 C3-15 C3-16 C3-17 C3-18
Switchover frequency 1 Switchover frequency 2 Speed loop proportional gain at low frequency Speed loop integral time at low frequency Speed loop proportional gain at high frequency Speed loop integral time at high frequency Speed loop integral property Torque adjustment proportional gain Kp Torque adjustment integral gain Ki Excitation adjustment proportional gain Kp Excitation adjustment integral gain Ki Flux braking gain Field weakening torque correction ratio Slip compensation gain Speed loop feedback filter time
Range: 1.00Hz to C3-02 Range: C3-00 to A0-14 Range: 0.1 to 10.0
Range: 0.01s to 10.00s
Range: 0.1 to 10.0
Range: 0.01s to 10.00s Range: 0 ~1 Range: 0 to 30000 Range: 0 to 30000 Range: 0 to 30000
Range: 0 to 30000 Range: 0 to 200 Range: 50% to 200% Range: 50% to 200% Range: 0.000s to 1.000s
Default: 5.00 Hz Default: 10.00Hz Default: 4.0
Default: 0.50s
Default: 2.0
Default: 1.00s Default: 0 Default: 2000 Default: 1300 Default: 2000
Default: 1300 Default: 0 Default: 100% Default: 100% Default: 0.015s
137
Parameter Description
C3-19 C3-20 C3-21 C3-22 C3-23
Speed loop output filter time Source of power-driven torque upper limit Power-driven torque upper limit Source of braking torque upper limit Braking torque upper limit
OD9L User Manual
Range: 0.000s to 1.000s Range: 0 to 4 Range: 0.0% to 200.0% Range: 0 to 4 Range: 0.0% to 200.0%
Default: 0.000s Default: 0 Default: 150.0% Default: 0 Default: 150.0%
5.21 Group E0 System Parameter
E0 is used to manage the inverter function code group, users can set it according to the actual need.
E0-00 Parameters only for reading
Range: 0 ~ 1
Default: 1
0: Ineffective
1: Except E0-00, all the function code can only read, but can't be modified. It can avoid the
mis-operation to the parameters.
E0-01 LCD Top menu display
Range: 0 ~ 5
Default: 0
It is used to select the second display variables of LCD top menu on running, and first display
variable is the operating frequency and cannot be changed.
0: output current
1: motor rotation speed
2: load speed
3:output voltage
4:PID giving
5: PID feedback
E0-02 LCD language selection
Range: 0 ~ 1
Default: 0
0:Chinese
1:English
5.22 Group E1 User Function Code Customization
OD9L series of inverter provide 31 customized function code, for the user's convenience to read, modify and shortcut operations. After customizing the function code by group E1, it can check and modify the function code by entering the user menu mode USEr. How to enter or quit the user menu mode please refer to chapter 4 (4.4 Function code menu mode and switchover description).
E1-00 Clear user-defined parameters
Range: 0 ~ 1
Default: 0
0: Ineffective
1: Clear the customized function code. After clearing E1-01~E1-31 are all uA0-00,
meanwhile, it can use A0-28 to recover the default function codes.
E1-01 User-defined parameter 1
Range: uA0-00 to uU1-xx 138
Default: uA0-03
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
E1-02 User-defined parameter 2
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-04
E1-03 User-defined parameter 3
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-06
E1-04 User-defined parameter 4
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-23
E1-05 User-defined parameter 5
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-24
E1-06 User-defined parameter 6
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA1-00
E1-07 User-defined parameter 7
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA1-01
E1-08 User-defined parameter 8
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA1-02
E1-09 User-defined parameter 9
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA1-04
E1-10 User-defined parameter 10
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA1-05
E1-11 User-defined parameter 11
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA1-06
E1-12 User-defined parameter 12
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA1-12
E1-13 User-defined parameter 13
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA1-13
E1-14 User-defined parameter 14
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA5-00
E1-15 User-defined parameter 15
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA5-01
E1-16 User-defined parameter 16
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA5-02
E1-17 User-defined parameter 17
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA6-00
E1-18 User-defined parameter 18
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA6-01
E1-19 User-defined parameter 19
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-00
E1-20 User-defined parameter 20
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-00
E1-21 User-defined parameter 21
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-00
E1-22 User-defined parameter 22
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-00
E1-21 User-defined parameter 23
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-00
E1-22 User-defined parameter 24
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-00
E1-23 User-defined parameter 25
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-00
E1-24 User-defined parameter 26
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-00
E1-25 User-defined parameter 27
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-00
E1-26 User-defined parameter 28
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-00
E1-27 User-defined parameter 29
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-00
E1-28 User-defined parameter 30
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-00
E1-29 User-defined parameter 31
Range: Same as E1-01
Default: uA0-00
The initial letter u of customized function range represents customized function code, and the
rest of them represent function code.
Example: uA0-03 means customized function code is A0-03, but uA0-00 means that
customized function code is empty.
5.23 Group E2 Optimizing Control Parameter
E2-00 Dead zone compensation selection 0: Without compensation 1: With compensation
Range: 0 ~ 1
Default: 1
E2-01 PWM modulation mode 0: Asynchronous modulation
Range: 0 ~ 1
Default: 0
139
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
1: Synchronous modulation. It's effective only on VF control mode and the running frequency must be more than 85Hz.
Synchronous modulation means the inverter carrier wave frequency is linear changing with the output frequency, generally used in occasions with high frequency and it's beneficial to improve the quality of output voltage. While asynchronous modulation has better effect when carrier wave frequency is constant, generally used in occasions with low frequency.
E2-02 PWM seven phase/five phase selection
Range: 0 ~ 1
Default: 0
0: it has 7 segments on the whole process.
1: Automatically switchover between 7 segments or 5 segments.
The inverter switching loss is big under the PWM 7 segments continuous modulation, but the
ripple current is smaller; while the inverter switching loss is small under 5 segments modulation,
but the ripple current is bigger and the motor noise is increasing.
E2-03 CBC current limit
Range: 0 ~ 1
Default: 1
0: Prohibited
1: Enable, it can decrease the overcurrent fault of the inverter in a greater degree, thus keeps
running uninterruptedly. If the inverter is in fast current limit for a long time, it will conduct Err33,
indicating that the inverter is overload and needs to stop.
E2-04 Braking threshold
Range: 350.0V to 780.0V Default: 690.0V<1>
<1> means the value of 380Vclass inverter, and when in 200V class this value is 360.0V.
This value is brake resistance startup point. If there exists brake resistance and the bus voltage
is bigger than E2-04, the inverter will release the excess energy through the brake resistance in
case of overvoltage.
E2-05 Under voltage threshold
Range: 200.0V to 500.0V Default: 350.0V<1>
<1> means the value of 380Vclass inverter, and when in 200V class this value is 200.0V.
This value is the judge point of undervoltage fault, when the bus voltage is lower than this
value in running status, the inverter will output Err12 undervoltage fault. Meanwhile it can choose
undervoltage fault reset mode by A9-17.
E2-06 Random PWM depth
Range: 0 to 6
Default: 0
This function is effective only on VF. The attached PWM can soften the monotonous and
harsh motor noise, and decrease the magnetic interrupt to the outside. The effect is different of the
attached PWM as the depth is different, 0 means ineffective.
E2-07 0Hz running way
Range: 0 to 2
0: No output current
1: Normal running
2: Output DC braking current A2-16.
Default: 0
E2-08 Limitation of low frequency carrier
Range: 0 to 2
Default: 0
0: Default limit mode
1: Low frequency carrier frequency is not higher than the 1/2 of relevant control mode.
140
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
2: No limit and the carrier frequency in all frequency bands are the same.
5.24 Group E3 AIAO Correction Parameter
E3-00 AI1 displayed voltage 1
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 3.000V
E3-01 AI1 measured voltage 1
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 3.000V
E3-02 AI1 displayed voltage 2
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 8.000V
E3-03 AI1 measured voltage 2
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 8.000V
E3-04 AI2 displayed voltage 1
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 3.000V
E3-05 AI2 measured voltage 1
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 3.000V
E3-06 AI2 displayed voltage 2
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 8.000V
E3-07 AI2 measured voltage 2
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 8.000V
Function codes E3-00 ~ E3-07 are used to revise the deviation between actual analog input
value and inverter display AI, in order to eliminate the influence of AI input port zero-deflection
and linearity. This group of function codes have been revised before the delivery in the factory,
meanwhile users can revise it again according to the actual need, but these parameters will recover
to default along with the recover default action. Generally there is no need to revise them.
The detected voltage means the actual voltage through the measure equipment like multimeter.
Display voltage means the inverter display value when sampling. AI1, AI2 display voltage
respectively corresponds to U1-19, U1-20.
When revising, input two voltage value in each AI input port, and respectively input the
detected value from the multimeter and the read value from group U0 to the above function codes,
thus the inverter will automatically revise AI zero-deflection and linearity.
E3-12 AO1 target voltage 1
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 3.000V
E3-13 AO1 measured voltage 1
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 3.000V
E3-14 AO1 target voltage 2
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 8.000V
E3-15 AO1 target voltage 2
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 8.000V
E3-16 AO2 measured voltage 1
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 3.000V
E3-17 AO2 target voltage 1
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 3.000V
E3-18 AO2 measured voltage 2
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 8.000V
E3-19 AO2 target voltage 2
Range: -9.999V to 10.000V Default: 8.000V
Function codes E3-12~E3-19 are used to revise the deviation between AO analog actual
output and theoretical output value. They have been revised in factory so there is no need to revise
again generally. When recover to default, their value will recover to the revised value on factory.
Target voltage means the theoretical output voltage of the inverter, U1-37 and U1-38
respectively correspond to AO1, AO2 target voltage. Measured voltage means the actual voltage
that measured by the equipments like multimeter.
Input target voltage and measured voltage respectively on the corresponding function code
when revising, the inverter will revise the output value automatically.
5.25 Group E4 Master-slave Control Parameter
Master-slave control means two or multi inverters exchange the data by point-to-point
141
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
communication, thus realize the speed synchronization and current balance function among the multi inverters, mainly used in multi-transmission occasions. Such as dredging machine, belt conveyer of coal mine etc. Please set the group A8 correctly before using.
When using 485 communication to conduct master-slave control, the inverter can't communicate with the master machine which adopt 485 communication mode, otherwise there will be fault on the system.
Ensure the master and slave direction When using master-slave control and synchronous speed, firstly please ensure that the running direction of the master machine and the slave machine is the same. If running direction of master machine and slave machine is not the same, you can adjust the direction by A0-13 or change the wiring order between the inverter and the motor to change the actual running direction. Master and slave parameter setting When multi inverter driving the same one load, there are two kinds of master-slave control mode. 1) Master machine control mode A0-03 is set as vector, slave machine is also vector and torque control. It's used in most of the occasions. 2) Master machine control mode A0-03 is set as VF, slave machine is also set as VF. On this condition please set a proper drop rate A7-18, otherwise the current between master and slave will be imbalance. 3) When the mechanical transmission rate of master and slave machine is in accordance, the maximum frequency A0-14 of master and slave machine must keep in accordance. 4) When master machine E4-02=0, the acceleration/ deceleration time of slave machine must set as 0; when master machine E4-02=1, the acceleration/ deceleration time of slave machine must keep same as the master machine. 5) There is only one master machine in the same one system, but slave machine can be multiple. Meanwhile wiring according to the communication mode, OD9L only uses 485 communication.
E4-00 Master-slave control selection 0: Prohibited 1: Enable
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
E4-01 Master-slave machine selection 0: Master machine 1: Slave machine
Range: 0~1
Default: 0
E4-02 Master sending frequency selection Range: 0~1
Default: 0<2>
0: Running frequency; on this condition the acceleration/ deceleration time must be set as 0,
otherwise when the master and the slave accelerating or decelerating, the speed will not in
synchronization.
1: Target frequency; on this condition it's needed to set a proper acceleration/ deceleration
time respectively for master and slave machine, otherwise the acceleration/ deceleration time of
master and slave machine will not in synchronization.
142
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
Command source selection of slave E4-03
followed the master
Range: 0~1
Default: 0<1>
0: Not follow, it means that the slave will not run after the master starts to run, so it's used to
detect if the system communication is normal or not.
1: Follow, it means the slave machine follows the command source of master machine to start
or stop synchronously.
E4-04 Slave received frequency coefficient Range: -10.00 to 10.00 Default: 1.00<1>
E4-05 Slave received torque coefficient
Range:-10.00 to 10.00 Default: 1.00<1>
E4-06 Slave received torque offset
Range: -50.00% to 50.00%
Default: 0<1>
E4-04~E4-06 are effective only to the slave machine, it's used to define the relationship
between slave received data and the master machine.
Assuming that the slave send data x; the slave machine use data Y, the coefficient of slave
received data is K(E4-04/E4-05), thus Y= K*x + b. When it's frequency b=0, and when it's torque
b=E4-06.
E4-07 Frequency offset threshold
Range: 0.20% to 10.00% Default: 0.50%
Master-slave communication E4-08
offline detection time
Range: 0.00s to 10.00s Default: 0.10s
They are used to set the detected time during the communication break between master and
slave. There is no detection when the value is 0.
Note: <1> Only effective on slave machine; <2> Only effective on master machine.
5.26 Group E5 Mechanical Braking Function Parameter
E5-00 Braking control selection
Range: 0~1
The band-type braking process is illustrated in below diagram:
Default: 0
Running command ON
Frequency E5-01 E5-04
Current E5-03
OFF Time
Time
Brake control Brake E5-02
Brake-release
143
Time
Brake Time
E5-05 E5-06
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
Fig.5-31 Band-type braking control process illustration
The braking process is as below: 1) After the inverter received the running command, it accelerates to the brake-release frequency that set by E5-01. 2) When the frequency reaches the E5-01 setting part, it outputs brake-release signal by DO terminal NO.32 function "braking control output", then the control brake is released. 3) Running with constant speed at brake-release frequency. In this period, the output current controlled by the inverter is not exceeding the current set by E5-03. 4) The inverter is running at brake-release frequency and after the running time reaching the E5-02 set value, it starts to accelerate to the set frequency. 5) After the inverter received the stop command, it decelerates to the brake frequency set by E5-04, and running with constant speed at this frequency. 6) After the running frequency reached the E5-04 set value, delay the brake frequency holding time set by E5-05, then output brake signal by DO terminal NO.32 function "brake control output", so the control brake works. 7) After the switch value outputs (brake control output) terminal outputs brake signal reaches the value set by E5-06, the inverter blocks the output and enter into the stop status.
E5-01 Braking loosen frequency
Range: 0.00Hz to 20.00Hz
Default: 2.50 Hz
When the frequency reaches this set value, the switch value output "brake control output"
terminal output brake signal, so the control brake is released. This value can be set according to
motor rated slip frequency. It's better to set a larger value on V/F control mode.
E5-02 Braking loosen frequency holding time Range: 0.0s to 20.0s Default: 1.0s After the switch value output "brake control output" terminal outputs brake signal, the
inverter stops acceleration in this period of time and restart after it reaches this set value. Please set it properly according to the machine release time.
E5-03 Braking period current threshold Range: 50.0% to 200.0% Default: 120.0% Before the inverter starts to accelerate from brake-release time (brake machine is not
completely released), the current is limited in this value.
E5-04 Braking actuation frequency
Range: 0.00Hz to 20.00Hz Default: 1.50 Hz
After the inverter received the stop command, it decelerates to run until the brake frequency
set by E5-04, and running in constant speed with this frequency to wait for outputting brake
control signal.
E5-05 Braking actuation delay time
Range: 0.0s to 20.0s
Default: 0.0s
After the running frequency reaches the brake frequency, delay the brake waiting time set by
E5-05. Then switch value output "brake control" terminal outputs brake release signal to control
the brake.
E5-06 Braking actuation frequency holding time Range: 0.0s to 20.0s Default: 1.0s
After the switch value output "brake control" terminal output brake release signal, holding for
a time set by E5-06, to ensure the brake
machine is completely pickup. Then the
144
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
inverter blocks the output and enter into the stop status.
5.27 Group E6 Wake-up Function Parameter
This group of parameters are mainly used to realize the sleep and wake-up function of constant pressure water supply, so please pay attention to below items:
1) please choose the mode E6-00 to control sleep function based on the application requirements.
2) when using PID in frequency source, if the sleep status PID is calculated is influenced by AA-29, so it must choose PID calculate on stop (AA-29=1).
3) Generally, please set the wake-up frequency ((100%- E6-03 wake-up deviation) * A0-14 maximum output frequency) bigger than the sleep frequency E6-01.
E6-00 Sleep selection
Range: 0~3
Default: 0
0: Sleep function is ineffective.
1: Digital input terminal DI control the sleep function.
After defined the NO.53 function of stator digital input DI terminal, it starts to sleep when DI
has delayed the valid sleep delay time A6-02.
2: The sleep function is controlled by PID set value and feedback value, at the moment the
inverter frequency source must be set as PID. Please refer to 5-28.
3: Control the sleep function according to the running frequency.
During the running process, it will enter into the sleep status when the setting frequency is
smaller or equivalent to sleep frequency E6-01. Otherwise, it will enter into the wake-up status
when the setting frequency is bigger than the wake-up frequency (E6-03 wake-up deviation*
A0-14 maximum output frequency).it will enter into the wake-up status.
E6-01 Sleep frequency
Range: 0.00Hz to 50.00Hz
Default: 0.00Hz
<1> When E6-00=1, this function is ineffective.
Sleep function come to effect and operation frequency is lower than this value, the inverter will
be stopped after sleep delay time E6-02.
Please refer to below illustration: A=PID output; B=PID feedback value.
145
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
t<E6-02 E6-01
A t >E6-02
Set value
E6-03
t E6-04
Stop
Start
t
Fig.5-32 Sleep process frequency illustration
E6-02 Sleep delay time
Range: 0.0s to 3600.0s
Default: 60.0s
It's used to set sleep delay time, and for functions please refer to the diagram 5-27.
E6-03 Wake-up deviation
Range: 0.0% to 100.0%
Default: 10.0%
When E6-00=2, this parameter takes the maximum pressure as reference object, that means
the maximum pressure corresponds to 100%.
When E6-00=3, this parameter takes the maximum frequency A0-14 as reference object, that
means the maximum frequency corresponds to 100%.
When the wake-up deviation between the given value and feedback value exceeds the value
defined by this parameter, after wake-up delay time E6-04, PID adjustor restarts. When it' s in positive effect (AA-4=0), wake-up value= set valuewake-up deviation; when
it's in negative effect (AA-4=1), wake-up value= set value+ wake-up deviation.
Please refer to below diagram:
C= wake-up value when parameter AA-04=1;
D= wake-up value when parameter AA-04=0;
E= feedback value is bigger than wake-up value, and holding time is longer than parameter
E6-04 (wake-up delay time), then PID function restarts.
E= feedback value is smaller than wake-up value, and holding time is longer than parameter
E6-04 (wake-up delay time), then PID function restarts.
Set value
E6-01 E6-03
C
}AA-04=1
}AA-04=0
D
t
E6-03 Set value
E6-03
E C
E6-04
D t
E6-04
146
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
Fig.5-33 Wake-up illustration
E6-04 Wake-up delay time
Range: 0.0s to 3600.0s
Default: 0.5s
It's used to set the wake-up delay time, for function please refer to diagram 5-29.
5.28 Group U0 Fault Record Parameter
The inverter has 3 groups of fault record parameters, and all of them are read-only parameters. So it's convenient for users to check and exclude relevant fault information of the inverter. For details please refer to appendix B (function code table) or the seventh chapter (trouble shooting).
5.29 Group U1 State Monitor Parameter
Parameter group U1 is used to monitor the relevant variate information of the inverter on running status. Customers can check it by panel for the convenience of adjustment, and they can also read the parameter group value by communication to monitor the master machine. The communication address is 0x71xx.
U1-00~ U1-31 are the running and stop monitor parameters that defined in A7-29 and A7-30.
U1-00 Running frequency
Minimum unit: 0.01Hz
U1-01 Setting frequency
Minimum unit: 0.01Hz
U1-02 Bus voltage
Minimum unit: 0.1V
U1-03 Output voltage
Minimum unit: 1V
U1-04 Output current
Minimum unit: 0.1A
U1-05 Output power
Minimum unit: 0.1kW
U1-06 DI input status, hexadecimal
Minimum unit: 1
They are used to display the present status value of DI terminal. After switched to binary
value, each bit corresponds to one DI input signal. 1 represents that this input is high level signal,
while 0 represents this input is low level signal. The corresponding relationship of each bits and
input terminals is displayed in below form:
Bit 0 DI1 Bit 8 Reserve
Bit 1 DI2 Bit9 Reserve
Bit 2 DI3 Bit 10 Reserve
Bit 3 DI4 Bit 11 Reserve
Bit 4 DI5 Bit 12 Reserve
Bit 5 Reserve Bit 13 Reserve
Bit 6 Reserve Bit 14 Reserve
Bit 7 Reserve Bit 15 Reserve
U1-07 DO output status, hexadecimal
Minimum unit: 1
It's used to display the output status value of DO terminal. After switched to binary value,
each bit corresponds to one DO input signal. 1 represents that this input is high level signal, while
0 represents this input is low level signal. The corresponding relationship of each bits and output
terminals is displayed in below form:
Bit 0 Relay 1
Bit 8
Bit 1 Relay 2
Bit 9
Bit 2 Y1 Bit 10
Bit 3 Reserve Bit 11
Bit 4 Reserve Bit 12
Bit 5 Reserve Bit 13
Bit 6 Reserve Bit 14
Bit 7 Reserve Bit 15
147
Parameter Description
OD9L User Manual
Reserve Reserve Reserve Reserve Reserve Reserve Reserve Reserve
U1-08 U1-09 U1-10 U1-11 U1-12 U1-13 U1-14 U1-15 U1-16 U1-17 U1-18 U1-19 U1-20 U1-21 U1-22 U1-23 U1-24 U1-25 U1-26 U1-27 U1-28 U1-29 U1-30 U1-31 U1-32 U1-33 U1-34 U1-36 U1-37 U1-38
U1-39
U1-40 U1-41 U1-42
AI1 voltage after correction AI2 voltage after correction PID setting, PID setting ( percentage)×AA-05 PID feedback, PID feedback ( percentage)×AA-05 Count value Length value Motor speed PLC stage Input pulse frequency Feedback speed Remaining running time of A7-38 setting AI1 voltage before correction AI2 voltage before correction HDI5 high speed pulse sampling linear speed Load speed display Current power-on time Current running time Pulse input frequency Communication setting value Main frequency X Auxiliary frequency Y Target torque Output torque Output torque Torque upper limit Target voltage upon V/F separation Output voltage upon V/F separation Current motor number AO1 target voltage AO2 target voltage
AC drive running status:
0:Stop
1: Forward
2: Reverse
3: Fault AC drive current fault Agent remaining limited time AC input current
148
Minimum unit: 0.01V Minimum unit: 0.01V Minimum unit: 1 Minimum unit: 1 Minimum unit: 1 Minimum unit: 1 Minimum unit: 1 Minimum unit: 1 Minimum unit: 0.01kHz Minimum unit: 0.1Hz Minimum unit: 0.1min Minimum unit: 0.001V Minimum unit: 0.001v Minimum unit: 1m/min Minimum unit: 1rpm Minimum unit: 1min Minimum unit: 0.1min Minimum unit: 1Hz Minimum unit: 0.01% Minimum unit: 0.01Hz Minimum unit: 0.01Hz Minimum unit: 0.1% Minimum unit: 0.1% Minimum unit: 0.1% Minimum unit: 0.1% Minimum unit: 1V Minimum unit: 1V Minimum unit: 1 Minimum unit: 0.01V Minimum unit: 0.01V
Minimum unit: 1
Minimum unit: 1 Minimum unit: 1h Minimum unit: 0.1A
OD9L User Manual
Parameter Description
U1-43 PLC current stage remaining time
Minimum unit: 0.1
U1-47 Accumulative running time 1
Minimum unit: 1h
U1-48 Accumulative running time 2
Minimum unit: 1min
Notice:
Accumulative running time= Accumulative running time 1(U1-47)+ Accumulative running
time 2(U1-48)
149
OD9L User Manual
EMC
Chapter6 EMC(Electromagnetic Compatibility
6.1 Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of the electric equipment to run in the electromagnetic interference environment and implement its function stably without any interference on the electromagnetic interference environment.
6.2 Standard Description
In accordance with the requirements of the national standard GB/T12668.3, the inverter needs to comply with electromagnetic interference and anti-electromagnetic interference requirements.
The existing products at our company are in accordance with the latest international standard -IEC/EN61800-3.
2004(Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems part3:EMC requirements and specific test methods),which is equivalent to GB/T12668.3.
IEC/EN61800-3 assesses the inverter in terms of electromagnetic interference and anti-electronic interference. Electromagnetic interference mainly tests the radiation interference, conduction interference and harmonics interference on the inverter (required for the inverter for civil use)Anti-electromagnetic interference mainly tests the conduction interference rejection, radiation interference rejection, surge interference rejection, fast and mutable pulse group interference rejection, ESD interference rejection and power low frequency end interference rejection (specific test items including: 1. Interference rejection tests of input voltage sag, interrupt and change; 2. Phase conversion interference rejection test; 3. Harmonic input interference rejection test; 4. Input frequency change test; 5. Input voltage unbalance test; 6. input voltage fluctuation test).
In accordance with the above requirements of IEC/EN61800-3 to be tested, our products are installed and used according to Section 6.3 and have a good electromagnetic compatibility in general industry environment.
6.3 EMC Guide
6.3.1 Harmonic Effect
Higher harmonics of power supply may damage the inverter .Thus ,at some places where mains quality is rather poor ,it is recommended to install AC input reactor.
6.3.2 Precautions on Electromagnetic Interference and Installation
There are two kinds of electromagnetic interferences. one is interference of electromagnetic noise in the surrounding environment on the inverter, and the other is interference of inverter on the surrounding equipment.
Installation precautions: (1) The earth wire of the inverter and other electric products shall be well grounded.
150
OD9L User Manual
EMC
(2) The power input and output power cables on the inverter and weak current signal cables (e.g. control line) shall not arranged in parallel and vertical arrangement is preferable.
(3) It is recommended that the output power cables of the inverter employ shield cables or steel pipe shielded cables ,all of its shielding layer be grounded reliably, the lead cables of the equipment suffering interferences are recommended to employ twistedpair shielded control cables and its shielding layer be grounded reliably.
(4) When the length of motor cable is longer than 100 meters, it needs to install output filter or reactor
6.3.3 Handing method for the interference of the surrounding equipment on the
inverter
Generally these reason for electromagnetic interference on the inverter is that at some places nearby inverter where plenty of relays, contactors and electromagnetic brakes shall be installed. when the inverter has error action due to the interferences ,the following measures can be taken:
(1) Install surge suppressor on the devise generating interference (2) Install filter at the input end of the inverter ,refer to Section 7.3.6 the specific operations (3) The control signal cable of the inverter and cable of detection line shall employ shielded cable and the shielding layers shall be earthed reliably.
6.3.4 Handing method for the interference of inverter on the surrounding
equipment
These interference include two types :one is the radiation interference of the inverter, and the other is the conduction interference of the inverter. These two types of interferences cause the surrounding electric equipments which suffer elector magnetic or electrostatic induction. The surrounding equipments hereby produce error action. For the different interferences, their solutions are shown as follows:
(1) For the measuring meters ,receivers and sensors ,this signals are generally weak ,if they which are placed nearby the inverter or together with the inverter in the same control cabinet are easy to suffer interference and to generate error actions .Suggestions to be handled with following methods: put in places far away from the interference source; do not arrange the signal cables with the power cables in parallel and never bind them together both the signal cables and power cables employ shielded cables and are well earthed; install ferrite magnetic ring(with suppressing frequency of 30h2 to 1000h2)at the output side of the inverter and wind it 23 cycles; install EMC output filter in more severe conditions.
(2) When both the equipment suffering interference and the inverter make use of the same power supply, it many cause conduction interference .if the above method cannot remove the interference ,it can install EMC filter between the inverter and the power supply (refer to Section 7.3.6 for the prototyping operation)
(3) The surrounding equipment is separately earthed, which can avoid the interference caused by the leakage current of the inverter's earth wire when common earth mode is adopted.
151
EMC
OD9L User Manual
6.3.5 Leakage current and handling
There are two forms of leakage current when using the inverter. One is leakage current to the earth, and the other is leakage current between the cables.
(1) Factors influencing the leakage current to the earth and the solutions: There are distributed capacitance between the lead cables and the earth. The larger the distributed capacitance is, the larger the leakage current will be. The distributed capacitance can be reduced by effectively reducing the distance between the inverter and the motor. The higher the carrier frequency is, the larger the leakage current will be. The leakage current can be reduced by reducing the carrier frequency. However, reducing the carrier frequency may result in addition of motor noise. Note that additional installation of reactor is also an effective method to remove the leakage current. The leakage current may increase following the addition of circuit current. Therefore, when the motor power is high, the corresponding leakage current will be high too. (2) Factors of producing leakage current between the cables and solutions: There is distributed capacitance between the output cables of the inverter. If the current passing the lines has higher harmonic, it may cause resonance and thus result in leakage current. If thermal relay is used, it may generate error action. The solution is to reduce the carrier frequency or install output reactor. It is recommended that thermal relay not be installed before the motor when using the inverter, and that electronic over current protection function of the inverter be used instead.
6.3.6 Precautions for Installing EMC input filter at the input end of power supply
When add a EMCS filter on the power source input end, please pay attention to below items: (1) When using the inverter, please follow its rated values strictly. Since the filter belongs to Classification I electric appliances, the metal enclosure of the filter shall be large and the metal ground of the installing cabinet shall be well earthed and have good conduction continuity. Otherwise there may be danger of electric shock and the EMC effect may be greatly affected. (2) Through the EMC test, it is found that the filter ground must be connected with the PE end of the inverter at the same public earth. Otherwise the EMC effect may be greatly affected. (3) The filter shall be installed at a place close to the input end of the power supply as much as possible. (4) The EMC input filter can't be used on the output end of the inverter.
152
Trouble Shooting
OD9L User Manual
Chapter 7 Trouble Shooting
7.1 Fault Warnings and Solutions
If faults happened on the running process, the inverter will stop to output immediately to protect the motor, and the corresponding fault relay of the inverter has contact action at the same time so the panel will display the fault code. The fault types and regular solutions that corresponding to the fault code are listed below in the table. Details in below form is only for reference, so please don't fix or change it by yourself. If you can't clear out the fault please contact us or the local agent for technical support.
Tab.7-1 Fault warning and solutions
Display Err01
Err04
Fault Name Inverter unit protection
Over current during
acceleration
Possible Causes 1: The output circuit is grounded or short circuited. 2: The module overheats. 3: The internal connections become loose. 4: The main control board is faulty, drive board or module is faulty.
1: The output circuit is grounded or short circuited. 2: Motor parameter is not right. 3: The acceleration time is too short. 4: Manual torque boost or V/F curve is not appropriate. 5: The voltage is too low. 6: The startup operation is performed on the rotating motor. 7: A sudden load is added during acceleration. 8: The AC drive model is of too small.
Solutions
1: Eliminate external faults. 2: Check the air filter and the cooling fan. 3: Connect all cables properly. 4: Contact the agent or the manufacturer for help.
1: Eliminate external faults. 2: Perform the motor autotuning. 3: Increase the acceleration time. 4: Adjust the manual torque boost or V/F curve. 5: Adjust the voltage to normal range. 6: Select rotational speed tracking restart or start the motor after it stops. 7: Remove the added load. 8: Select an AC drive of higher power class.
153
Trouble Shooting
OD9L User Manual
Display Err05 Err06 Err08 Err09
Fault Name
Over current during
deceleration
Over current at constant
speed
Overvoltage during
acceleration
Overvoltage during
deceleration
Possible Causes
1: The output circuit is grounded or short circuited. 2: Motor parameter is not right. 3: The deceleration time is too short. 4: The voltage is too low. 5: A sudden load is added during deceleration. 6: The braking unit and braking resistor are not installed. 7:Magnetic flux brake gain too much
1: The output circuit is grounded or short circuited. 2: Motor parameter is not right. 3: The voltage is too low. 4: A sudden load is added during operation. 5: The AC drive model is of too small.
1The input voltage is too high. 2An external force drives the motor during acceleration. 3The acceleration time is too short. 4The braking unit and braking resistor are not installed. 5Motor parameter is wrong.
1The input voltage is too high. 2An external force drives the motor during deceleration. 3The deceleration time is too short. 4The braking unit and braking resistor are not installed.
Solutions
1: Eliminate external faults. 2: Perform the motor autotuning. 3: Increase the deceleration time. 4: Adjust the voltage to normal range. 5: Remove the added load. 6:Install the braking unit and braking resistor. 7:Decrease the overmagnetic flux brake gain.
1: Eliminate external faults. 2: Perform the motor autotuning. 3: Adjust the voltage to normal range. 4: Remove the added load. 5: Select an AC drive of higher power class. 1Adjust the voltage to normal range. 2Cancel the external force or install a braking resistor. 3Increase the acceleration time. 4Install the braking unit and braking resistor. 5Perform the motor auto-tuning. 1Adjust the voltage to normal range. 2Cancel the external force or install a braking resistor. 3Increase the deceleration time. 4Install the braking unit and braking resistor.
154
OD9L User Manual
Trouble Shooting
Display Err10 Err12
Err13 Err14
Err15 Err17 Err20
Fault Name Overvoltage at constant
speed
Undervoltage
Drive overload
Motor overload
Drive overheat
Current detection
fault Short circuit
to ground
Possible Causes
1The input voltage is too high. 2An external force drives the motor during acceleration.
1. Instantaneous power failure occurs. 2. The input voltage exceeds the allowed range. 3. The DC bus voltage is too low. 4. The rectifier bridge and Buffer resistor are faulty. 5. The drive board is faulty. 6. The control board is faulty.
1. The load is too heavy or the rotor is locked. 2. The drive is of too small power class.
1: A9-01istoosmall. 2: The load is too heavy or the rotor is locked. 3: The drive is of too small power class.
1: The ambient temperature is too high. 2: The air filter is blocked. 3: The cooling fan is damaged. 4: The thermally sensitive resistor of the module is damaged. 5: The inverter module is damaged.
1: The internal connections become loose. 2: The HALL device is faulty. 3: The control or drive board is faulty. The motor is short circuited to the ground.
Solutions 1Adjust the voltage to normal range. 2Cancel the external force or install a braking resistor.
1. Reset the fault. 2. Adjust the input voltage to within the allowed range. 3. Seek for maintenance.
1: Reduce the load, or check the motor, or check the machine whether it is locking the rotor. 2: Select a drive of higher power class. 1: SetA9-01correctly. 2: Reduce the load,or check the motor, or check the machine whether it is locking the rotor. 3: Select a drive of higher power class.
1: Lower the ambient temperature. 2: Clean the air filter. 3: Replace the damaged fan. 4: Replace the damaged thermally sensitive resistor. 5: Replace the inverter module.
1: Connect all cables properly. 2: Seek for maintenance.
Replace the cable or motor.
155
Trouble Shooting
OD9L User Manual
Display Fault Name Possible Causes
Err23
Power input phase loss
1: The three-phase power input is abnormal. 2: The drive board is faulty. 3: The lightening board is faulty. 4: The main control board is faulty.
Err24 Err25 Err27
1: The cable connecting the AC
drive and the motor is faulty.
Power output phase loss
2: The AC drive's three-phase outputs are unbalanced when the motor is running.
3: The drive board is faulty.
4 The module is faulty.
EEPROM read-write fault
The EEPROM chip is damaged.
1: The host computer is in
abnormal state.
Communication 2: The communication cable is
faulty.
fault
3: The communication
parameters in group A8 are set
improperly.
Err28
External equipment
fault
External fault normally closed or normally open signal is input via DI.
Err29
Too large speed
deviation
1: The load is too heavy and the acceleration time is too short. 2: A9-31 and A9-32 are set incorrectly.
Err30 Err31 Err32
User-definedf ault1
User-definedf ault2
PID feedback lost during running
Theuser-definedfault1signalisinp utviaDI. Theuser-definedfault2signalisinp utviaDI.
The PID feedback is lower than the setting of AA-13.
Solutions
1: Eliminate external faults. 2: Seek for maintenance.
1: Eliminate external faults. 2: Check whether the motor three-phase winding is normal. 3: Seek for maintenance.
Replace the main control board. 1: Check cabling of the host computer. 2: Check the communication cabling. 3: Set the communication parameters properly.
Reset the fault.
1: Increase the acceleration and deceleration time. 2: Set A9-31 and A9-32 correctly based on the actual situation. Reset the fault.
Reset the fault. Check the PID feedback signal or set AA-26 to a proper value.
156
OD9L User Manual
Trouble Shooting
Display Fault Name Possible Causes
Err33
Fast current limit fault
1: The load is too heavy or the rotor is locked. 2: The acceleration time is
too short.
Err34 Err35
Load becoming 0
Control power supply fault
The detection is reached. Get more details form A9-28 to A9-30. 1: The input voltage is not within the allowable range. 2:The power on and off is too frequently.
Err37
Data storage Communication between DSP
fault
and EEPROM fault.
Err39
Current running time of AC Current running
time reached driver is larger than .A7-38 value.
Err40
Accumulative The accumulative running time running time reaches the setting value of
reached A7-20.
Err42 Err46
Motor
Change the selection of the
switchover fault motor via terminal during
during running running of the AC drive.
Master slave control
communication disconnection
1:There is no set host but set the slave machine 2:The communication cable is faulty or communication parameter setting not correct.
Solutions 1: Reduce the load, or change the inverter with larger power. 2: Increase the acceleration time.
Reset the fault or reset A9-28 to A9-30 value
1: Adjust the input voltage to the allowable range. 2:Extension of power on cycle. 1: Replace the main control board. 2: Contact the agent or the manufacturer for help.
Reset the fault.
Clear the record through the parameter initialization function or set A7-20 to a new value.
Perform motor switchover after the AC drive stops.
1: Set host and reset the fault. 2: Check the communication cabling and communication parameters A8.
157
Trouble Shooting
OD9L User Manual
7.2 Common Faults and Treating Methods
The inverter will possibly be confront with below faults, please refer to the mentioned methods to have simple diagnosis and find the solutions.
Tab.7-2 Common faults and treating methods
serial Fault Name number
Possible Causes
Solutions
1: There is no power supply or the
power supply is too low.
2: The switching power supply on
1: Check the power
the drive board is faulty.
There is no 3: The rectifier bridge is damaged.
supply.
2: Check the bus voltage.
1
display at 4: The buffer resistor of the drive is 3: Re-connect the keypad
power-on.
damaged.
5: The control board or the keypad
and 30-core cables.
4: Contact the agent for
is faulty.
technical support.
6: The cable between the control
board and the drive board or
keypad breaks.
1: Measure the insulation
1: The motor or the motor output
of the motor and the
"Err20" is
cable is short-circuited to the
output cable with a
2
displayed at
power-on
ground. 2: The AC driver is damage.
megger. 2: Contact the agent for
technical support.
1: The setting of carrier frequency 1: Reduce the carrier
Err15
(module
is too high. 2: The cooling fan is damaged, or
frequency (A0-26). 2: Replace the fan and
3
overheat)
the air filter is blocked.
clean the air filter.
fault is
reported
3: Components inside the AC drive are damaged (thermal coupler or
3: Contact the agent for technical support.
frequently.
others).
1: Check the motor and the motor 1: Ensure the cable
cables.
between the AC drive
The motor 2: The AC drive parameters are set
and the motor is normal.
does not rotate improperly (motor parameters). 2: Replace the motor or
4
after the AC 3: The cable between the drive
clear mechanical faults.
drive runs.
board and the control board is in 3: Check and re-set motor
poor contact.
parameters.
4: The drive board is faulty.
158
OD9L User Manual
serial number
5
Fault Name Possible Causes
The DI terminals are
disabled.
1: The parameters are set incorrectly.
2: The external signal is incorrect. 3:Wrong location of the DI dial
switch. 4: The control board is faulty.
1: The motor parameters are set
The AC drive improperly.
reports
6
over-current
2: The acceleration/deceleration time is improper.
and
3: The load fluctuates.
over-voltage
frequently
Trouble Shooting
Solutions
1:Check and reset the parameters in group A5.
2: Re-connect the external signal cables.
3. Wrong location of the DI dial switch.
4: Contact the agent for technical support.
1:Re-set motor parameters or re-perform the motor auto- tuning.
2: Set proper acceleration/ deceleration time.
3: Contact the agent for technical support.
159
OD9L User Manual
Modbus Communication Protocol
Appendix A OD9L Series Modbus Communication
Protocol
OD9L series of frequency converters can provide RS232/RS485 communication interface, and use MODBUS communication protocol. The user can realize the central control through computer or PLC. Also it can set the running commands, modify or read the function code parameter, read the working status and fault information of the frequency converter according to the protocol.
1. Communication Protocol Content
This serial communication protocol has defined the content and the working format in serial communication, including master machine polling format (or broadcast) and master machine encoding method. The content includes the function code of the requested action, data transmission, error checking, etc. Same structure is used on the slave machine response, which includes action confirmation, data returning, error checking, etc. If the slave machine has an error in receiving information or cannot complete the requirements from the master machine, it will send a fault signal back as a response to the master machine.
2. Application Mode
The frequency converter connect PC/PLC network with RS232/RS485 bus and single master but multiple slave machines.
3. Bus Structure
(1) Interface mode
RS232/RS485 hardware interface
(2) Transmission mode It's asynchronous serial and half-duplex transmission mode. For master machine and slave
machine, only one can send data and another one receive it at the same time. In the process of serial asynchronous communication, the data is transmitted frame by frame in the form of message.
(3) Topological structure In single master machine and multiple slave machines system, the setup range of slave
address is"1~247", and "0 "is the broadcast communication address. The address of the slave machine in net work must be unique.
4. Protocol specification
OD9L series frequency converter communication protocol is a asynchronous serial and master-slave Modbus communication protocol, only one facility (master machine) in network can
160
OD9L User Manual
Modbus Communication Protocol
set up protocol (called "query/command") , other facilities (slave machines) can only response to the "query/command" of master machine according to the data provided, or make relevant action by "query/command" from the master machine. The master machine here means personal computer (PC), industrial controlled facility or programmable logic controller (PLC), etc., the slave machine means OD9L frequency converter. The master machine can not only communicate with one slave machine separately, but also broadcast information to all the slave machines. For the separate access to "query/command" of master machine, the slave machine will return information (called response). For the broadcast information from the master machine, the slave machines need not to response to the master machine.
5. Communication frame structure
The Modbus protocol data format of OD9L series of frequency convert is as follows: If use RTU mode, the message must be sent with a pause of at least 3.5 characters time. Different character time is very easy to get under the circumstance of varieties of network baud rates. The first domain of the message transmission is the equipment address, the usable transmissive characters are hexadecimal 0~9, A~F. Network equipment continuously detect the network trunk line, including the pause time. Once the first domain (address domain) is received, all the facilities will decode to make out if it's sent to their own. After the last characters sent, a pause with at least 3.5 character time buckets indicates the end the message. A new message can be started after the pause. The entire message frames must be sent as a continuous flow. If there was a pause over 1.5-character time before the frame completed, the receiving equipment will update the incomplete message and assume the next byte as address domain of a new message. Likewise, if a new message was sent following with the previous one during less than 3.5-character time, the receiving equipment will regard it as the extension of the previous message. This will lead to an error, because the result is impossible to be right with the value of CRC domain at last. RTU frame format
Frame Header START Slave Address ADR The command code CMD
The content of the data DATAN-1
The content of the data DATAN-2 ...........
The content of the data DATA0
CRC CHK High order CRC CHK Low order
END
3.5 characters time Contact address:1247 03Read the parameter of the slave machine 06Write the parameters of the slave machine
The content of the DATA The address of function code parameters; The quantity of function code parameters; The value of function code parameters;
detection valueCRC16 verified value. High byte is sent previous than low byte.
3.5-characters time
Command instruction (CMD) and data description (DATA)
161
Modbus Communication Protocol
OD9L User Manual
Command code: 03H, read N words (Word), it can read at most 12 words and N = 1 ~ 12
words. Specific format is as below:
Frame Slave CMD High Low
High
Low
The high The low END
Header Addr
address address function function byte of byte of
START
code code CRC
CRC
number number
>=3.5 1
Addres Addres
>=3.5
03
00
N<=12 *
*
chars 247
s_H
s_L
chars
Example: reading continuous 2 parameters from frequency convert A0-03 whose slave machine address is 01. (The return frames are divided into standard MODBUS format and nonstandard MODBUS format)
The command from the master machine
Frame Slave CMD High Low
Header Addr
address address
START
>=3.5
0x
0x
0XA
0x
chars
01 03
0
03
High function code number
0x 00
Low function code number
0x 02
The high byte of CRC
0x07
The low byte of CRC
0x0B
END
>=3.5 chars
The replies from the slave machine (standard Modbus)
Frame Slave C Read the A0-03 A0-03 A0-04
Header Addr M paramete High Low High
START
D rnumber byte byte byte
value value value
>=3.5
0x 0x
0x
0x
0x
0x
chars
01 03
04
00
00
00
A0-04 Low byte value
0x 00
The high byte of CRC
0x FA
The low byte of CRC
0x 33
END
>=3.5 chars
The replies from the slave machine (nonstandard Modbus)
Frame Slave CM Read the Read the A0-03 A0-03 A0-04 A0-04 The The END
Header Addr D high byte low byte High Low High Low high low
START
of the of the byte byte byte byte byte byte
paramete paramete value value value value of of
r number r number
CRC CRC
>=3.5
>=3.5
chars 0x
0x 0x
0x
0x
0x
0x
0x
0x 0x chars
01
03 00
00
04 00 00 00 43 07
If change the control mode from A0-03 to VF (A0-03=1), change the running command source to terminal control (A0-04), the replier data will be: take nonstandard MODBUS as an example, pay attention that it has an extra high byte of parameter quantity than standard
162
OD9L User Manual
Modbus Communication Protocol
BODBUS. Frame Slave Header Addr START
>=3.5
charact 0x
ers
01
C Read the Read the A0-0 A0-03
M high byte low byte of 3
Low
D of
parameter High byte
parameter number byte value
number
value
0
x 0x
0x
0x 0x
0 00
04
00 01
3
A0-04 High byte value
0x 00
Command code: 06H, writing in a parameter data.
Frame Slave C
High Low High byte of
Head
Addr M Addr. Addr. the content
START
D
written in
Low byte of the content written in
>=3.5 chars
1 247 06
Addr Addr
_H
_L
Data_H
Data_L
A0-04 The The EN
Low high low D
byte byte byte
value of of
CRC CRC
>=
0x
0x 0x 3.5
01 D3 07 ch
ars
High Low END
byte of byte
the CRC of the
CRC
>=3.5
*
*
chars
Example: writing address 01 in the slave machine, function code of the frequency convert control method is vector control mode and A0-03=1.
Command from the master machine
Frame Head START
Slave CMD High Low High byte Low byte High Low END
Addr
address address of the of the byte of byte
content content the of the
written in written in CRC CRC
>=3.5
0X
chars
01
06
0xA0 0x03 0x00
>=3.5
0x01
0x8B 0x0A chars
Reply from the slave machine
Frame Slave CMD High
Head
Addr
address
START
>=3.5
0X
chars
01
06 0xA0
Low address
0x03
High byte Low byte High Low END
of the of the byte of byte
content content the of the
written in written in CRC CRC
>=3.5
0x00
0x01
0x8B 0x0A
chars
Note: if the command written in is not successful, the failed reason will be fed back.
6. Verification mode (CRC verification mode)
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) use RTU frame format, the message includes error checking domain based on CRC method. CRC domain checked the content of the entire message. CRC domain is 2 bytes, containing a 16-bit binary value. It's added to the message after calculated by transmission equipment. The receiving device recalculates the CRC message
163
Modbus Communication Protocol
OD9L User Manual
after the information received, and compare with the value in the received CRC. If the two CRC values are not equal, it indicates that errors happened on transmission.
CRC saves 0xFFFF firstly, and then call a process to deal continuous 8-bit bytes in the message with the value in current register. Only 8 bit data in each character is effective to CRC, start bit, stop bit and the parity bit are ineffective.
During the process of CRC, each 8- bit character individually exclusive or the content in the register (XOR), the result shifts to the least significant bit while the most significant bit is filled with a "0". The LSB is picked out to test, if the LSB is 1, the register exclusive or the preset value, if the LSB is 0, no action taken. The whole process will be repeated 8 times. When the last bit (the 8th bit) is done, the next 8-bit character separately exclusive or the current value in the register again. The final value in the register is the CRC value after all the bytes in the message have been dealt with.
When adding CRC to message, the lower bytes are add previous than the higher bytes. The simple CRC function is as follow:
unsigned int crc_chk_valueunsigned char *data_value, unsigned char length
{
unsigned int crc_ value=0xFFFF;
int i;
whilelength--
{
crc_value^=*data_value++;
fori=0;i<8;i++
{
ifcrc_value&0x0001
{
crc_value=crc_value>>1^0xa001;
}
else
{
crc_value=crc_value>>1;
}
}
}
returncrc_value;
}
164
OD9L User Manual
Modbus Communication Protocol
7. The definition of communication parameter address
This part is the content about communication, which used for controlling the running and working status of the frequency convert, and set relevant parameter.
Parameter of read and write function code (some function code can't be changed, only for supplier and monitor usage):
Labeling rule of function code address: Use the group number and mark number of the function code as parameter address rule: The high bytes: A0~AF (group F)C0~CF (group C)E0~EF (group E)F0~FF (group F) 70~7F (group U) the low byte00~FF For exampleA0-11the address indicated as A00B; Attention: Group AF: The parameter can neither be read nor be altered. Group U: The parameter can only be read, but not be altered. Some parameter can't be changed when the frequency convert is on running status; some parameter can't be changed regardless of any status of the frequency convert; please pay attention to the range, unit and relevant instruction when changing the function code parameter.
Group number of function code
Group A0~AE Group C0~CF Group E0~EF Group F0~FF Group U0U1
Access address of communication
0xA000~0xAFFF 0xB000~0xBFFF 0xC000~0xCFFF 0xF000~0xFEFE 0x70xx0x71xx
Function code address of communication revise the
RAM
0x0000~0x0EFF
0x4000~0x4FFF
0x5000~0x5FFF
0x6000~0x6FFF
Pay attention that if the EEPROM is stored continuously, the service life will be reduced. So there is no need to store some function code on the communication mode, just need to change the value in RAM.
If it's group A of the parameter to realize this function, just need to change high byte from A to 0 on the function code address.
If it's group C of the parameter to realize this function, just need to change high byte from B to 4 on the function code address.
The relevant function code address indicated as below: High byte: 00~0F (group A)40~4F (group C) the low byte: 00~FF For example: function code A0-11 doesn't store in EEPROM, the address indicated as 000B; this address means that it only can write RAM, but can't use the read action, if it's being read, the address is ineffective.
165
Modbus Communication Protocol
OD9L User Manual
Stop / Run Parameter
Parameter Address (HEX)
Parameter Description
1000/9000
1000:*Communication set value(-1000~1000) (decimal) (readable and writable) (minimum unit:0.01%),Read/Write
9000: range(0HZ~A0-14) (minimum unit:0.01Hz), Read/Write
1001
Set frequency (minimum unit:0.01Hz), Read-only
1002
Running frequency (minimum unit:0.01Hz) , Read-only
1003
Busbar voltage (minimum unit: 0.01V) , Read-only
1004
Output voltage (minimum unit: 0.1V) , Read-only
1005
Output current (minimum unit: 0.1A) , Read-only
1006
Output power (minimum unit: 0.1kw) , Read-only
1007
DI input flag (minimum unit: 1) , Read-only
1008
DO output flag (minimum unit: 1) , Read-only
1009
PID set (minimum unit: 1) , Read-only
100A
PID feedback (minimum unit:1 ) , Read-only
100B
AI1 voltage (minimum unit: 0.01V) , Read-only
100C
AI2 voltage (minimum unit: 0.01V) , Read-only
100D
AO1 output voltage (minimum unit: 0.01V) , Read-only
100E
PLC step (minimum unit: 1) , Read-only
100F
Rotate speed (minimum unit: 1rpm) , Read-only
1010
Count value input (minimum unit: 1) , Read-only
1011
Pulse frequency input (minimum unit: 0.01kHz) , Read-only
1012
Feedback speed (minimum unit: 0.1Hz) , Read-only
1013
The remaining run time (minimum unit: 0.1 min) , Read-only
1014
Voltage before AI1 revised (minimum unit: 0.001V) , Read-only
1015
Voltage before AI2 revised (minimum unit: 0.001V) , Read-only
1016
The actual linear speed (minimum unit: 1m/min) , Read-only
1017
Load speed (minimum unit: user-defined, refer to A7-32) , Read-only
1018
present power-on time (minimum unit: 1min) , Read-only
1019
Present run time (minimum unit: 0.1min) , Read-only
101A
Pulse frequency input (minimum unit: 1Hz) , Read-only
166
OD9L User Manual
Modbus Communication Protocol
101B 101C 101D
101E
101F
1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028
Main frequency X display (minimum unit: 0.01Hz) , Read-only Auxiliary frequency Y display (minimum unit: 0.01Hz) , Read-only Target torque (minimum unit: 0.1%), regard motor rated torque as 100%, Read-only Output torque (minimum unit: 0.1%), regard motor rated torque as 100%, Read-only Output torque (minimum unit: 0.1%), regard inverter rated current as 100%, Read-only Upper limit torque (minimum unit: 0.1%), regard inverter rated current as 100%, Read-only VF separate target voltage (minimum unit: 1V) , Read-only VF separate output voltage (minimum unit: 1V) , Read-only Reserved, Read-only Motor 1/2 direction (minimum unit: 1) , Read-only Length value input (minimum unit: 1) , Read-only AO2 output voltage (minimum unit: 0.1V) , Read-only Status of the invert (minimum unit: 1) , Read-only Present malfunction (minimum unit: 1) , Read-only
Example 1: read the run frequency of the first machine: 0x01 0x03 0x10 0x02 0x00 0x01 0x21 0x0A 0x10 0x02 (1002) run frequency address, 0x00 0x01 (0001) one data 0x21 0x0A (210A) CRC verified value.
Example 2: read the busbar voltage, output voltage, output current of the first machine at the same time: 0x01 0x03 0x10 0x03 0x00 0x03 CRC verified value, the meaning of the data is similar to example 1.
Attention: Communication set value is a relative percentage value, 10000 correspond to 100.00% and -10000 correspond to -100.00% For the data of frequency dimension, this percentage is the percentage of the relative maximum frequency (A0-14); for the data of torque, this percentage is A4-21, A4-23, C3-21, C3-23.
Control command input to the frequency convert: (Write only)
Command word address (HEX)
Command word function
0001: Forward operation
0002: Reverse operation
2000
0003: Forward jog 0004: Reverse jog
0005: Free stop
0006: Slow-down stop
167
Modbus Communication Protocol
OD9L User Manual
0007: Fault reset
Example 3: give command forward rotating to the second machine: 0x02 0x06 0x20 0x00
0x00 0x01 CRC verified value
Read the status of the frequency convert: (read only)
Status word address (HEX)
Status word function
0001: Forward operation
3000
0002: Reverse operation
0003: Stop
Digital output terminal control: (write only)
Command address (HEX)
Command content
BIT0: RELAY1 output control
2001
BIT1: RELAY2 output control
BIT2: DO1 output control
Attention: D0 output terminal need to choose 16 (communication control) function.
Analog AO1 control: (write only)
Command address (HEX) Command content
2002
0~7FFF represent 0%~100%
Analog AO2 control: (write only)
Command address (HEX) Command content
2003
0~7FFF represent 0%~100%
Attention: AO output need to choose 7 (communication control output) function.
Fault descriptions of the frequency convert:
The fault address (HEX)
The fault detail information
0000: Fault free
0001: Reserve
0002: Reserve
0003: Reserve
0004: Accelerated over current
0005: Decelerated over current
8000
0006: Constant over current
0007: Over current on stop
0008: Accelerated over voltage
0009: Decelerated over voltage
000A: Constant over voltage
000B: Over voltage on stop
000C: Undervoltage fault
168
OD9L User Manual
Modbus Communication Protocol
8000
000D: Frequency convert overload 000E: Motor overloading 000F: Module over heat 0010: Reserve 0011: Current detection fault 0012: Reserve 0013: Reserve 0014: Earth short circuit of the motor 0015: Tuning fault of the motor 0016: Reserve 0017: Shortage- phase on input 0018: Shortage- phase on output 0019: Abnormal read and write on EEPROM 001A: Enter the password more than the limit times 001B: Abnormal communication 001C: External fault 001D: Over speed deviation 001E: Fault 1 that user defined 001F: Fault 2 that user defined 0020: Lost the PID feedback on running 0021: Limit current fault of the hardware 0022: Off load 0023: Overload on the buffer resistance 0024: Abnormal contactor 0025: The agent running time is up 0026: Over temperature of the motor 0027: Present running time is up 0028: Accumulated running time is up 0029: Power-on time is up 002A: Fault on switching the motor 002B: Over speed of the motor 002C: Reserve 002D: Reserve 002E: Reserve 002F: Fault on point- to- point communication of slave machine
When it has fault on communication, the return address is: reading fault 83XX, writing fault 86XX.
169
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Appendix B Function Parameter Table
The symbols in the function code table are described as follows: "":The parameter can be modified when the AC drive is in either stop or running state. "":The parameter cannot be modified when the AC drive is in the running state. "":The parameter is the actually measured value and cannot be modified. "":The parameter is factory parameter and can be set only by the manufacturer Enhancement code: group C0~group C3, group E0~group E6, are started by function code parameter A7-76.
170
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Default Property
GroupA0: Standard Function Parameters
A0-00 Product model
Product model: 5 digital display, 2 decimal point
50#.##
G/P type display A0-01
0: G type1: P type
0: Heavy duty 1: Normal duty
0
A0-02 Rated driver current
0.1A to 3000.0A
Model dependent
A0-03 Control mode
1: Sensor-less flux vector control
(SFVC). 2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F)
2
control.
0: Operation keypad control
(LED off).
A0-04 Running command source 1: Terminal control (LED on). selection
0
2: Communication control (LED
blinking).
A0-05
Base frequency for
0: Running frequency.
modification during running 1: Set frequency.
0
0: UP/ DOWN setting
(non-recorded after stop).
1: UP/ DOWN setting (retentive after stop).
A0-06
Main frequency source X selection
2: AI1 3: AI2 4: Multi-speed.
1
5: Simple PLC.
6: PID
7: Communication setting.
8: Pulse setting.
A0-07
Auxiliary frequency source Y selection
0: UP/ DOWN setting (non-recorded after stop).
1: UP/ DOWN setting
0
171
Function Parameter Table
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
Range of auxiliary
A0-08
frequency Y selection
A0-09 Range of auxiliary frequency Y
A0-10 Frequency source selection
Setting Range
(Retentive after stop). 2: AI1 3: AI2 4: Multi-reference. 5: Simple PLC. 6: PID 7: Communication setting. 8: Pulse setting.
0: Relative to maximum frequency.
1: Relative to main frequency X.
0%100%
Default Property
0
100%
Unit's digit
(Frequency source selection).
0Main frequency source X.
1X and Y operation result.
2Switchover between X and Y (by DI terminal).
3Switchover between X and "X
and Y superposition" (by DI
terminal).
4Switchover between Y and "X
00
and Y superposition" (by DI
terminal).
Ten's digit()
0X+Y
1X-Y
2Max(X,Y)
3Min(X,Y)
A0-11 Preset frequency
0.00 to maximum frequency 50.00Hz A0-14. 172
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
A0-13 Rotation direction
Setting Range
0: Same direction 1: Reverse direction 2: Reverse forbidden
Function Parameter Table Default Property
0
Maximum output A0-14
frequency
50.0Hz1200.0 Hz(A0-20=1) 50.0Hz600.00 Hz(A0-20=2)
A0-15 Frequency source upper limit
0: Set by A0-16 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: Communication setting 4: Pulse setting
50.00Hz
0
A0-16 Frequency upper limit
Frequency lower limit(A0-18)to 50.0Hz maximum frequency (A0-14)
A0-17 Frequency upper limit offset
A0-18 Frequency lower limit
0.00 Hz to maximum frequency (A0-14).
0.00Hz
0.00 Hz to frequency upper limits
(A0-16).
0.00Hz
173
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
A0-19
Command source binding select
Unit's digit: Binding operation keypad command to frequency source. 0: No Binding 1:Digital setting 2: AI1 3: AI2 4: Multi-speed 5: Simple PLC 6: PID 7: Communication setting. 8: Pulse setting(HDI5). Ten's digit: Binding operation terminal command to frequency source. Hundred's digit: Binding operation communication command to frequency source. Thousand's digit: Reserved.
Frequency fractional A0-20 selection
1: 0.1Hz 2: 0.01Hz
A0-21
Acceleration/Deceleration time unit
0: 1s 1: 0.1s 2: 0.01s
A0-22 A0-23
Acceleration/Deceleration time base frequency
Acceleration time 1
0: Maximum frequency (A0-14) 1: Set frequency 2: Rated motor frequency
0s30000s (A0-21 = 0) 0.0s3000.0s (A0-21 = 1) 0.00s300.00s (A0-21 = 2)
OD9L User Manual
Default Property
000
2
1
0
10.0s
174
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
A0-24 Deceleration time 1
A0-25
Over modulation voltage boost
A0-26 Carrier frequency
A0-27
Carrier frequency adjustment with temperature
A0-28 Initialization parameters
LCD upload or download A0-29 parameter selection
Setting Range
Default Property
0s30000s (A0-21 = 0) 0.0s3000.0s (A0-21 = 1) 0.00s300.00s (A0-21 = 2)
0% to 10%
10.0s
3%
0.5kHz16.0kHz
Model
dependent
0: No 1: Yes
1
0:No operation.
1:Restore factory parameters, except motor parameters, record information and A0-20.
2:Clear the record information.
0
3:Backup the current user parameters.
4:User parameter backup recovery.
0:no function 1:Download parameter to LCD 2:only uploadA1 function
parameters 3: Upload parameters except
theA1 group 4: Upload all the parameters
0
GroupA1: Motor 1Parameters
A1-00 Auto-tuning selection
0: No auto-tuning 1: Static auto-tuning 2: Complete auto-tuning
0
A1-01 Rated motor 1 power A1-02 Rated motor 1 voltage
0.1kW to 1000.0kW 0V to 1500V
Model
dependent
380
175
Function Parameter Table
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Default Property
Number of pole pairs of A1-03 motor 1
2 to 64
Model dependent
A1-04 Rated motor 1 current
0.01A to 600.00 A (motor rated
power 30 kW).
A1-01
0.1A to 6000.0 A (motor rated dependent
power >30kW).
A1-05 Rated motor frequency
0.01Hz to A0-14
50.00Hz
A1-06
Rated motor 1 rotational speed
0rpm to 60000rpm
A1-01
dependent
A1-07 Motor 1 no-load current
0.01A to A1-04 A (motor rated
power 30 kW).
Model
0.1A to A1-04 A (motor rated dependent
power >30kW).
A1-08 Motor 1 stator resistance 0.001to 65.535 A1-09 Motor 1 rotor resistance 0.001to 65.535 A1-10 Motor 1 mutual inductive 0.1mH to 6553.5mH A1-11 Motor 1 leakage inductive 0.01mH to 655.35mH
Model
dependent
Model
dependent
Model
dependent
Model
dependent
A1-12 A1-13
Acceleration time of complete auto-tuning
Deceleration time of complete auto-tuning
1.0s to 6000.0s 1.0s to 6000.0s
10.0s
10.0s
Group A2: Start/ Stop Control
A2-00 Start mode
0: Direct start.
1: Rotational speed tracking restart.
0
2: Pre-excited start(asynchronous motor).
176
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Default Property
A2-01
Rotational speed tracking mode
0: From frequency at stop 1: From zero speed 2: From maximum frequency
0
A2-02
Max current of rotational speed tracking
30%150%
100%
A2-03
Rotational speed tracking speed
1100
20
A2-04 Startup frequency
0.00Hz10.00Hz
0.00Hz
A2-05 Startup frequency holding 0.0s100.0s time
0.0s
A2-06
Startup DC braking current/ Pre-excited current
0%100%
0%
A2-07 Startup DC braking time/ 0.0s100.0s Pre-excited time
0.0s
Acceleration/Deceleration 0: Linear
A2-08 mode
1: S-curve
0
A2-09
Acceleration time proportion of S-curve start segment
0.00%80.00%
20.00%
A2-10
Deceleration time proportion of S-curve start segment
0.00%80.00%
20.00%
A2-11
Acceleration time proportion of S-curve end segment
0.00%80.00%
20.00%
A2-12
Deceleration time proportion of S-curve end 0.00%80.00%
segment
20.00%
A2-13 Stop mode
A2-14
Initial frequency of stop DC braking
0: Decelerate to stop 1: Coast to stop
0
0.00HZ maximum frequency (A0-14)
0.00Hz
177
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
A2-15
Waiting time of stop DC braking
A2-16 Stop DC braking current
A2-17 Stop DC braking time
A2-21 Demagnetization time
Setting Range
0.0s100.0s 0%100% 0.0s36.0s 0.01s3.00s
A2-23
Nonstop at instantaneous stop (when power fail) mode selection
0: Ineffective 1: Automatic start at power fluctuation 2: Decelerate to stop.
A2-24
Deceleration time of nonstop at instantaneous stop
0.0s to 100.0s
A2-25 A2-26
Effective voltage of nonstop at instantaneous stop
Recovery voltage of nonstop at instantaneous stop
60% to 85% 85% to 100%
A2-27
Detection time of instantaneous stop nonstop recovery voltage
0.0s to 300.0s
A2-28
Auto-regulation gain of nonstop at instantaneous stop
0 to 100
A2-29
Auto-regulation integral time of nonstop at instantaneous stop
1 to 100
Group A3:V/F Control Parameters
OD9L User Manual
Default Property
0.0s
0%
0.0s
0.50s
0
10.0s
80%
90%
0.3s
40
20
178
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
A3-00 V/F curve setting
A3-01 Torque boost
Setting Range
0: Linear V/F. 1: Multi-point V/F. 2: Square V/F. 3: 1.7-power V/F. 4: 1.5-power V/F. 5: 1.3-power V/F. 6: Voltage and frequency
complete separation. 7: Voltage and frequency half
separation.
0.0%30.0%
Default Property
0
0.0%
Cut-off frequency of A3-02 torque boost
0.00 Hz to maximum output frequency (A0-14).
25.00Hz
A3-03 A3-04 A3-05 A3-06
Multi-point V/F frequency 1 (F1)
Multi-point V/F voltage 1 (V1)
Multi-point V/F frequency 2 (F2)
Multi-point V/F voltage 2 (V2)
0.00Hz to A3-05 0.0% to 100.0% A0-05 to A3-07 0.0% to 100.0%
3.00Hz
8.0%
10.00Hz
20.0%
A3-07
Multi-point V/F frequency 3 (F3)
0.00Hz to 50.00Hz
Multi-point V/F voltage 3
A3-08 (V3)
0.0% to 100.0%
A3-09 Slip compensation ratio 0.0% to 200.0%
50.00Hz 100.0% 50.0%
V/F Magnetic flux brake A3-10
Gain
0 to 200
100
Oscillation suppression A3-11 gain
0 to 100
Model
dependent
A3-13 Slip compensation time 0.02s to 1.00s
0.30s
179
Function Parameter Table
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Default Property
0: Digital setting (A3-16).
1: AI1
2: AI2
A3-15
Output voltage source for voltage and frequency separation
3: Multi-reference 4: Simple PLC 5: PID 6: Communication setting.
0
7: Pulse setting (DI5).
100.0% corresponds to the rated.
A3-16 Voltage digital setting for 0 V to rated motor voltage V/F separation
A3-17
Voltage rise time of V/F separation
0.0s to 3000.0s
Voltage decline time of
A3-18 V/F separation
0.0s to 3000.0s
0V
1.0s
1.0s
0: Frequency and voltage
Stop mode selection upon declining independently.
A3-19 V/F separation
0 1: Frequency declining after
voltage declines to 0.
Group A4:Vector Control Parameters
A4-00 Switchover frequency 1 1.00Hz to A4-02
5.00Hz
A4-02 Switchover frequency 2 A4-00 to A0-14
10.00Hz
Speed loop proportional A4-04 gain at low frequency
A4-05
Speed loop integral time at low frequency
A4-06
Speed loop proportional gain at high frequency
A4-07
Speed loop integral time at high frequency
A4-08
Speed loop integral property
1.0 to 10.0
0.01s to 10.00s
1.0 to 10.0
0.01s to 10.00s 0Integral take effect 1Integral separation
4.0
0.50s
2.0
1.00s
0
180
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
A4-11
Torque adjustment proportional gain Kp
A4-12
Torque adjustment integral gain Ki
Setting Range 0 to 30000 0 to 30000
Default Property
2200
1500
A4-13
Excitation adjustment proportional gain Kp
0 to 30000
2200
A4-14
Excitation adjustment integral gain Ki
A4-15 Flux braking gain
0 to 30000 0 to 200
1500
0
A4-16
Field weakening torque correction ratio
50% to 200%
A4-17 Slip compensation gain 50% to 200%
A4-18
Speed loop feedback filter time
0.000s to 1.000s
A4-19
Speed loop output filter time
0.000s to 1.000s
100%
100%
0.015s
0.000s
A4-20
Source of power-driven torque upper limit
0: A4-21
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: Communication setting
4: Pulse setting (DI5)
(Analog range corresponds toA4-21)
0
A4-21
Power-driven torque upper limit
0.0% to 200.0%
150.0%
A4-22
Upper limit source of braking torque
A4-23 Braking torque upper
0: A4-23
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: Communication setting 4: Pulse setting (DI5)
0
(Analog range corresponds to A4-23)
0.0% to 200.0%
150.0%
181
Function Parameter Table
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
limit
Setting Range
Default Property
Group A5: Input Terminals
A5-00 X1 function selection A5-01 X2 function selection A5-02 X3function selection A5-03 X4 function selection A5-04 X5 function selection
A5-05 X6 function selection
A5-06 X7 function selection
0: No function 1: Forward RUN (FWD) 2: Reverse RUN (REV) 3: Three-wire control
1
2
9
4Forward JOG (FJOG) 5Reverse JOG (RJOG)
12
6Speed increase 7Speed Decrease
13
8Coast to stop
9Fault reset (RESET)
10RUN pause
11External fault normally open
13
(NO) input.
12Constant speed 1
13Constant speed 2
14Constant speed 3
15Constant speed 4
16Terminal 1 for acceleration/
deceleration time selection
17DI for acceleration/ deceleration time selection
13
18Frequency source switchover
19 MOTPOT setting clear (terminal, OTPOT setting clear (terminal, keypad)
182
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
A5-06 X7 function selection
Function Parameter Table
Setting Range
Default Property
20Command source switchover terminal 1
21 Acceleration/Deceleration prohibited
22PID pause
23PLC status reset
24Swing pause
25Timer trigger input
26 Immediate DC injection braking
27External fault normally
closed (NC) input
28Counter input
29Counter reset
30Length count input
31Length reset
32Torque control prohibited.
33 Pulse
input
(enabledonlyforDI5).
34 Frequency modification
forbidden.
35PID action direction reverse.
36ExternalSTOPterminal1.
37Command source switchover terminal 2
38PID integral disabled
39 Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40Switchover between
auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41Switchover between motor 1 183
Function Parameter Table
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Default Property
and motor 2 42Reserved 43PID parameter switchover 44Speed control/Torque control switchover 45Emergency stop 46External STOP terminal 2 47 Deceleration DC injection braking 48Clear the current running time 49Switchover between two-line mode and three-line mode 50Reverse run prohibited 51User- defined fault 1 52User-defined fault 2 53Dormant input
A5-10 XDIfilter time
0.000 to 1.000s
0.010s
A5-11
Terminal command mode
0: Two-line mode 1 1: Two-line mode 2 2: Three-line mode 1 3: Three-line mode 2
0
A5-12 Terminal UP/DOWN rate 0.01Hz/s to 100.00Hz/s
1.00Hz/s
A5-13
Terminal effective mode 1
0: High level 1: Low level Unit's:DI1; Ten's:DI2; Hundred's:DI3; Kilobit:DI4; Myriabit:DI5
00000
A5-15 AI1 minimum input
0.00V to 10.00V
0.00V
184
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
Corresponding setting of A5-16 AI1 minimum input
Setting Range -100.0% to 100.00%
A5-17 AI1 maximum input
0.00V to 10.00V
Corresponding setting of
A5-18
-100.0% to 100.00%
AI1 maximum
A5-19 AI1 filter time
0.00s to 10.00s
A5-20 AI2 minimum input
0.00V to 10.00V
Corresponding setting of
A5-21
-100.0% to 100.00%
AI2 minimum input
A5-22 AI2 maximum input
0.00V to 10.00V
Corresponding setting of
A5-23 AI2 maximum
-100.0% to 100.00%
A5-24 AI2 filter time
0.00s to 10.00s
A5-30 Pulse minimum input
0.00KHz to 50.00KHz
Corresponding setting of
A5-31 pulse minimum input
-100.0% to 100.00%
A5-32 Pulse maximum input
0.00KHz to 50.00KHz
A5-33 Corresponding setting of -100.0% to 100.00% pulse maximum input
A5-34 Pulse filter time
0.00s to 10.00s
A5-35 X1DI1 On delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s A5-36 X1DI1Off delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s A5-37 X2DI2 On delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s A5-38 X2DI2 Off delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s A5-39 X3DI3 On delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s
185
Function Parameter Table
Default Property
0.0%
10.00V
100.0%
0.10s
0.00V
0.0%
10.00V
100.0%
0.10s
0.00KHz
0.0%
50.00KH z
0.0%
0.10s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
A5-40 X3DI3 Off delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s
AI1 function selection as
A5-41 DI terminal
0 to 53 as DI terminal function.
A5-42
AI2 function selection as 0 to 53 as DI terminal function. DI terminal
AI effective mode A5-44 selection as DI terminal
Unit's digit(AI1). 0: High level effective. 1: Low level effective. Ten's digit(AI2). 0: High level effective. 1: Low level effective. Hundred's digit::reserved
A5-45 AI curve selection
Unit's digit (AI1 curve selection) 0: 2 points curve. 1: Multi-point curve 1. 2: Multi-point curve 2. Ten's digit (AI2 curve selection). 0: 2 points curve 1: Multi-point curve 1 2: Multi-point curve 2 Hundred's digit: reserved
AI Signal input type A5-46 selection
Unit's digit:AI1; Ten's digit:AI2 0:Voltage style 1:Current style
Group A6: Output Terminals
OD9L User Manual
Default Property
0.0s
0
0
00
00
00
186
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
A6-00 6-02
Relay 1 functionTA TB TC Relay
Y1 function
0No output 1AC drive running 2Fault output 3Frequency-level detection FDT1 reached 4Frequency reached 5Zero-speed running
(no output at stop) 6Motor overload pre-warning 7AC drive overload pre-warning 8PLC cycle completed 9Accumulative running time reached 10Frequency limited 11Ready for RUN 12AI1>AI2 13Frequency upper limit reached 14Frequency lower limit reached 15Undervoltage state output 16Communication setting 17Timer output 18Reverse running 19Reserved 20Length reached 21Torque limited 22Current 1 reached 23Frequency 1 reached 24Module temperature reached 25Load lost
Default Property
2
1
1
187
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
FM terminal output A6-04 selection A6-05 FMR output selection
AO1 output function A6-09 selection
OD9L User Manual
Setting Range
26Accumulative power-on time reached 27Clocking reached output 28Current running time reached 29Set count value reached 30Designated count value reached 31: Motor 1 and motor 2 indication 32: Brake control output 33Zero-speed running 2 (having output at stop) 34Frequency level detection FDT2 output 35Zero current state 36Software over current 37Frequency lower limit reached (having output at stop) 38Alarm output 39Reserved 40AI1 input overrun 41Reserved 42Reserved 43Frequency 2 reached 44Current 2 reached 45Fault output
0: pulse output (FMP) 1: open loop collector switch value output (FMR)
Same as Y1 output selection
Default Property
0
0
0: Running frequency 1: Set frequency
0
188
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
A6-10 AO2 output function selection
A6-11 FMP output function selection
Function Parameter Table
Setting Range
2: Output current 3: Output power 4: Output voltage 5: Analog AI1 input 6: Analog AI2 input 7: Communication setting 8: Output torque 9: Length 10: Count value 11: Motor rotational speed 12: Output bus voltage(0 to 3 times of driver rated) 13: Pulse input 14: Output current 15: Output voltage(100.0% corresponds to 1000.0V) 16: Output torque (Actual value: -2 to +2 times of the rated value
Default Property
0
0
FMP output A6-12 max-frequency
0.01KHz~100.00KHz
A6-13 AO1 minimum output
-100.0% to A6-15
A6-14 Minimum corresponds to 0.00V to 10.00V AO1 output
A6-15 AO1 maximum output
A6-13 to 100.0%
A6-16
Maximum corresponds to AO1 output
0.00V to 10.00V
A6-17 AO2 minimum output
-100.0% to A6-19
Minimum corresponds to
A6-18 AO2 output
0.00V to 10.00V
A6-19 AO2 maximum output
A6-17 to 100.0%
50.00
0.0%
0.00v
100.0%
10.00V
0.0%
0.00v
100.0%
189
Function Parameter Table
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Maximum corresponds to
A6-20 AO2 output
0.00V to 10.00V
A6-26 Relay 1 output delay
0.0s to 3600.0s
A6-27 Relay 2 output delay
0.0s to 3600.0s
A6-28 Y1 high level output delay 0.0s to 3600.0s
Group A7: Auxiliary Functions and Keypad Display
A7-00 JOG running frequency
0.00 Hz to maximum frequency
A7-01 JOG acceleration time
0.0s to 3000.0s
A7-02 JOG deceleration time
0.0s to 3000.0s
A7-03 Acceleration time 2
0.0s to 3000.0s
A7-04 Deceleration time 2
0.0s to 3000.0s
A7-05 Acceleration time 3
0.0s to 3000.0s
A7-06 Deceleration time 3
0.0s to 3000.0s
A7-07 Acceleration time 4
0.0s to 3000.0s
A7-08 Deceleration time 4
0.0s to 3000.0s
A7-09 Jump frequency 1
0.00 Hz to maximum frequency
A7-10
Jump frequency 1 amplitude.
0.00 Hz to maximum frequency
A7-11 Jump frequency 2
0.00 Hz to maximum frequency
A7-12
Jump frequency 2 amplitude.
0.00 Hz to maximum frequency
A7-15
Forward/Reverse rotation dead-zone time.
0.0s to 3000.0s
Default Property
10.00V
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
6.00Hz
10.0s
10.0s
10.0s
10.0s
10.0s
10.0s
10.0s
10.0s
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.0s
190
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
A7-16 Keypad knob accuracy
A7-17
Running mode when set frequency lower than frequency lower limit.
Setting Range
0: Default mode
1: 0.1Hz
2: 0.5Hz
3: 1Hz
4: 2Hz
5: 4Hz
6: 5Hz
7: 8Hz
8: 10Hz
0: Run at frequency lower limit 1: Stop 2: Run at zero speed
A7-18 Droop ration
0.0% to 100.0%
A7-19
Delay time of stopping mode when set frequency lower than frequency lower limit.
0.0s to 600.0s
A7-20
Setting accumulative running time.
0h to 65000h
A7-21 JOG preferred
A7-22
Frequency detection value (FDT1)
0: Disable 1: Enable 0.00 Hz to maximum frequency
A7-23
Frequency detection hysteresis (FDT hysteresis 1)
0.0% to 100.0%
A7-24 Detection range of frequency reached
0.0% to 100.0%
A7-25 Reserved
A7-26 Cooling fan control
0: Fan working continuously.
1: Fan working during running
(Fan working after stopping when temperature is higher than 40 ).
Default Property
0
0
0.0%
0.0s
0h
1
50.00Hz
5.0%
0.0%
0
0
191
Function Parameter Table
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
A7-27
STOP/RESET key function
0: STOP/RESET key enabled only in operation keypad control.
1: STOP/RESET key enabled in any operation mode.
Quick/JOG function A7-28
selection
0: Forward JOG.
1: Switchover between forward rotation and reverse rotation.
2: Reverse JOG.
3: Switchover between operation keypad control and remote command control.
A7-29 LED display running parameters
0000 to 0xffff
Bit00: Running frequency 0001
Bit01: Set frequency
0002
Bit02: Bus voltage (V) 0004
Bit03: Output voltage 0008
Bit04: Output current 0010
Bit05: Output power (kW) 0020
Bit06: DI input status 0040
Bit07: DO output status 0080
Bit08: AI1 voltage (V) 0100
Bit09: AI2 voltage (V) 0200
Bit10: PID setting
0400
Bit11: PID feedback
0800
Bit12: Count value
1000
Bit13: Length value 2000
Bit14: load speed display 4000
Bit15: PLC stage
8000
Default Property
1
0
H.401f
192
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
LED display running A7-30 parameters 2
LED display stop A7-31 parameters
Function Parameter Table
Setting Range
Default Property
0x0~0x1FF
Bit00: target torque 0001
Bit01: output torque 0002
Bit02: pulse input frequency (KHz) 0004
Bit03: HDI input liner speed(m/min) 0008
Bit04: motor rotation speed0010
0x00
Bit05: AC line current 0020
Bit06: Accumulative running time(h)
Bit07: The current running time(min)
Bit08: Accumulative power consumption (KW/h)
Bit09~Bit15: reserved
1 to 0xffff
Bit00: Set frequency 0001
Bit01: Bus voltage (V) 0002
Bit02: DI input status 0004
Bit03: DO output status 0008
Bit04: AI1 voltage (V) 0010
Bit05: AI2 voltage (V) 0020
Bit06: PID setting
0040
H.0003
Bit07: PID feedback 0080
Bit08: Count value 0100
Bit09: Length value 0200
Bit10:Load speed display 0400
Bit11:PLC stage 0800
Bit12: Pulse input frequency1000
Bit13~Bit15: Reserved
193
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Load speed display A7-32 coefficient
Temperature of inverter A7-33 module
A7-34
Accumulative power-on time
Setting Range 0.001 to 65.500 12 to 100 0h to 65535h
A7-35 Accumulative running time 0h to 65535h
A7-37
Current running time function
A7-38
Current running time source
0: Disable 1: Enable:
0: Digital setting A7-39 1: AI1 2: AI2 (100% of analog input
corresponds to A7-39)
A7-39
Setting of current running time
0.0min to 6500.0min
A740 High level timing
0.0s to 6000.0s
A7-41 Low level timing
0.0s to 6000.0s
A7-42 Startup protection
A7-44
Frequency reached detection value 1
A7-45
Frequency reached detection duration 1
0: No 1: Yes 0.00Hz to A0-14
0.0% to 100.0%
A7-46 Current detection level 1 0.0% to 300.0%
A7-47
Current reached duration 1
detection
0.0% to 300.0%
A7-50 User code
0 to 65535
194
OD9L User Manual
Default Property
1.000
Measure d value
Measure d value
Measure d value
0
0
0.0min
2.0s
2.0s
1
50.00Hz
0.0%
100.0%
0.0%
0
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Jump frequency during A7-51 acceleration and
deceleration
A7-52
Setting power-on reached time
A7-54
Frequency switchover point between acceleration time 1 and acceleration time 2
A7-55
Frequency switchover point between deceleration time 1 and deceleration time 2
Setting Range 0:Disable 1:Enable
0h to 65530h
0.00Hz to maximum frequency(A0-14)
0.00Hz to maximum frequency(A0-14)
Frequency detection value A7-56 (FDT2)
0.00 Hz to maximum frequency
Frequency detectFDT2 A7-57 hysteresis value
0.0% to 100.0%
A7-58 Frequency reached detection value 2
A7-59
Frequency reached detection duration 2
0.00Hz to A0-14 0% to 100%
Zero current detection A7-60 level
Zero current detection A7-61 delay time
Current output detection A7-62
amplitude
0% to 300% 0% to 300% 20.0% to 400.0%
Current output detection A7-63
amplitude delay time
0.00s to 300.00s
A7-64 Current detection level 2 20% to 300%
A7-65
Current reached detection duration 2
0.0% to 300.0%
Default Property
0
0h
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
50.00Hz
5.0%
50.00Hz
0%
10.0%
1.0s
200.0%
0.00s
100%
0.0%
195
Function Parameter Table
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
A7-67 AI1 input voltage lower limit
AI1 input voltage upper A7-68 limit A7-69 Module temperature
threshold
Setting Range 0.00V to A7-68 A7-67 to 11.00V 0 to 90
Default Property
2.00V
8.00V
70
A7-70 Output power correction coefficient
0.001 to 3.000
1.000
Linear speed display A7-71 coefficient
Linear speed = F-71 * HDI1 pulse number per second /Ab-07
1.000
A7-72 Motor speed display coefficient
Motor speed = F-72* Motor real speed
1.000
Accumulative power A7-73 consumption
Performance software A7-74 version
0kWto 65535kW
Measured value
#.#
A7-75 Function software version
#.#
A7-76
Improve function parameter display selecting
0:Hide improvement function
parameter:C0~C3,E0~E6
0
1:Display improvement function
parameter:C0~C3,E0~E6
Group A8: Communication Parameters
196
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
A8-00 Baud rate
0: 300BPS 1: 600BPS 2: 1200BPS 3: 2400BPS 4: 4800BPS 5: 9600BPS 6: 19200BPS 7: 38400BPS
A8-01 Data format
0: No check <8,N,2> 1: Even parity check 2 <8,E,1> 2: Odd Parity check <8,O,1> 3: No check1 <8,N,1>
A8-02 Local address
0 to 247 (0 is Broadcast address)
A8-03 Response delay
0ms to 30ms
A8-04 Communication timeout 0.0s to 30.0s
Communication data A8-05 format selection
0: Standard MODBUS-RTU protocol
1: Nonstandard MODBUS-RTU protocol
Group A9: Fault and Protection
A9-00 A9-01 A9-02 A9-03
Motor overload protection selection.
Motor overload protection gain.
Motor overload warning coefficient.
Overvoltage stall gain
0: Disable 1: Enable 0.02 to 10.00
50% to 100%
0 to 100
A9-04
Overvoltage stall protective voltage
200.0V to 800.0V
Default Property
5
0
1
2ms
0.0s
0
1
1.00
80%
30
760.0V
197
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
A9-05 V/F overcurrent stall gain 0 to 100
A9-06
V/F overcurrent stall protective current
100% to 200%
A9-07
VF weak magnetic current stall protection coefficient.
50% to 200%
A9-08
Overvoltage stalling allowed to rise limit value
0% to 100%
A9-11 Fault auto reset times
0 to 20
A9-12
Fault relay action selection 0: Not act
during fault auto reset
1: Act
A9-13
Time interval of fault auto reset
0.1s to 100.0s
A9-14
Input phase loss protection 0: Disable
selection
1: Enable
A9-15
Output phase loss protection selection
0: Disable 1: Enable
A9-16
Short-circuit to ground upon power-on
0: Disable 1: Enable
A9-17
Undervoltage fault auto reset selection
0: Manual reset fault after the under voltage fault.
1: Auto reset fault according to the bus voltage after the fault.
Overvoltage inhibition A9-18 mode selection
0: Ineffective 1: Overvoltage inhibition mode 1 2: Overvoltage inhibition mode 2
Over excitation force state A9-19 selection
0: Ineffective
1:Effective during running at constant speed or deceleration
2: Effective during running at deceleration
OD9L User Manual
Default Property
20
150%
100%
10%
0
0
1.0s
1
1
1
0
1
2
198
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Default Property
A9-20
Threshold of over-voltage inhibition mode 2
1.0% to 150.0%
100.0%
A9-22
Fault protection action selection 1
0 to 22202
Unit's digit: Motor over load Err14
0: Coast to stop
1: Stop according to stop mode
2:Continue to run Ten's digit: Reserved
00000
Hundred's digit: Input phase loss - Err23
Thousand's digit: Output phase loss - Err24
Ten thousand's digit: Parameter read-write fault Err25
Fault protection action A9-23 selection 2
0 to 22222
Unit's digit: Communication fault Err27
0: Coast to stop
1: Stop according to stop mode
2:Continue to run
Ten's digit: External equipment fault Err28
00000
Hundred's digit: Too large speed deviation Err29
Thousand's digit: User-definedfault1 Err30
Ten thousand's digit: User-definedfault1 Err31
199
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
A9-24 Fault protection action selection 3
Setting Range
0 to 22022 Unit's digit: PID feedback lost during running Err32 0: Coast to stop 1: Stop according to stop mode 2:Continue to run Ten's digit: Load becoming 0 Err34 Hundreds place: reserved Thousands place: Current running time reached Err39 Ten thousand's digit: Accumulative running time reached Err40
A9-26
Frequency selection for continuing to run upon fault
0: Current running frequency 1: Set frequency 2: Frequency upper limit 3: Frequency lower limit 4: Backup frequency(A9-27)
Backup frequency upon A9-27 abnormality
0.0% to 100.0%
Protection upon load A9-28
becoming 0
0: Disable 1: Enable
A9-29 Detection level of load becoming 0
0.0% to 80.0%
A9-30 Detection time of load becoming 0
0.0s to 100.0s
Detection value of too large
A9-31 speed deviation
0.0% to 100.0%
Detection time of too large
A9-32 speed deviation
0.0s to 100.0s
OD9L User Manual
Default Property
00000
1
100.0%
0
20.0%
5.0%
20.0%
0.0s
200
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
A9-33 Over-speed detection value
0.0% to 100.0%
A9-34 Over-speed detection time 0.0s to 100.0s
Motor overload protection
A9-35 current coefficient
100% to 200%
AA-00 PID setting source AA-01 PID digital setting
Group AA: PID Function
0: Keypad 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: Communication setting 4: Pulse setting (DI5) 5: Multi-reference
0.0% to 100.0%
AA-02 PID setting change time Response time:0.00s to 650.00s
AA-03 PID feedback source
0: AI1 1: AI2 2: AI1 - AI2 3: Communication setting 4: Pulse setting (DI5) 5: AI1 + AI2 6: MAX(|AI1|,|AI2|) 7: MIN(|AI1|,|AI2|)
AA-04 PID action direction
0: Forward action 1: Reverse action
AA-05 PID feedback range setting 0 to 65535
AA-06 Proportional gain Kp
0.0 to 100.0
AA-07 Integral time Ti1
0.01s to 10.00s
AA-08 Differential time Td1
0.000s to 10.000s
Default Property
20.0%
2.0s
100%
0
50.0%
0.00s
0
0
1000
20.0
2.00s
0.000s
201
Function Parameter Table
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Default Property
Cut-off frequency of PID AA-09 reverse rotation AA-10 Deviation limit
0.00Hz to maximum frequency(A0-14)
0.0% to 100.0%
0.00Hz
0.0%
AA-11 Differential limit
0.00% to 100.00%
0.10%
AA-12 PID feedback filter time 0.00s to 60.00s
0.00s
Detection value of PID AA-13 feedback loss
0.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
Detection time of PID AA-14 feedback loss
0.0s to 3600.0s
3600.0s
AA-18 Proportional gain Kip
0.0 to 100.0
20.0
AA-19 Integral time Ti1
0.01s to 10.00s
2.00s
AA-20 Differential time Td1
0.000s to 10.000s
0.000s
0: No switchover
AA-21
PID parameter switchover condition
1: Switchover via DI 2: Automatic switchover based
0
on deviation
AA-22
PID parameter switchover deviation 1
0.0% to AA-23
20.0%
AA-23
PID parameter switchover deviation 2
AA-22 to 100.0%
80.0%
AA-24 PID initial value
0.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
PID initial value holding AA-25 time
AA-26
Maximum deviation between two PID outputs in forward direction
AA-27
Maximum deviation between two PID outputs in reverse direction
0.00s to 650.00s 0.00% to 100.00% 0.00% to 100.00%
0.00s
1.00%
1.00%
202
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
AA-28 PID integral property
AA-29 PID operation at stop
Setting Range
Unit's digit: Integral separated 0: Effective 1: Ineffective Ten's digit: integral selection when output reached limit 0:Continue 1:Stop
0:No PID operation at stop 1: PID operation at stop
Group Ab: Swing Frequency, Fixed Length and Count
Swing frequency setting Ab-00 mode
Ab-01 Ab-02
Swing frequency amplitude
Jump frequency amplitude
0: Relative to the central frequency 1: Relative to the maximum frequency
0.0% to 100.0%
0.0% to 50.0%
Ab-03 Swing frequency cycle
0.1s to 3000.0s
Triangular wave rising Ab-04 time coefficient
0.1% to 100.0%
Ab-05 Set length
0m to 65535m
Ab-06 Actual length
0m to 65535m
Number of pulses per Ab-07 meter
0.1 to 6553.5
Ab-08 Set count value
1 to 65535
Ab-09 Designated count value 1 to 65535
Group AC: Multi-Reference and Simple PLC Function
AC-00 Reference 0
-100.0% to 100.0%
Default Property
00
0
0
0.0%
0.0%
10.0s
50.0%
1000m
0m
100.0
1000
1000
0.0%
203
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
AC-01 Reference 1
AC-02 Reference 2
AC-03 Reference 3
AC-04 Reference 4
AC-05 Reference 5
AC-06 Reference 6
AC-07 Reference 7
AC-08 Reference 8
AC-09 Reference 9
AC-10 Reference 10
AC-11 Reference 11
AC-12 Reference 12
AC-13 Reference 13
AC-14 Reference 14
AC-15 Reference 15
AC-16
Simple PLC running mode
AC-16
Simple PLC running mode
OD9L User Manual
Setting Range
Default Property
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%
0.0%
0: Stop after the AC drive runs one cycle
0
1: Keep final values after the AC
drive runs one cycle
0
2: Repeat after the AC drive runs
one cycle
204
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Simple PLC retentive AC-17 selection
AC-18
Running time of simple PLC reference 0
AC-19
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 0
AC-20
Running time of simple PLC reference 1
AC-21
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 1
Running time of simple AC-22 PLC reference 2
AC-23
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 2
Running time of simple AC-24 PLC reference 3
AC-25
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 3
AC-26
Running time of simple PLC reference 4
AC-27
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 4
Setting Range
0: Non-retentive neither at power off nor after stop. 1: Retentive at power off but non-retentive after stop. 2: Non-retentive at power off but retentive after stop. 3: Retentive at power off and after stop.
0.0~6500.0
0 to 3 (Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
0.0~6500.0
0 to 3 (Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
0.0~6500.0
0 to 3 (Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
0.0~6500.0
0 to 3 (Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
0.0~6500.0
0 to 3 (Means acceleration/deceleration
Default Property
0
0.0
0
0.0
0
0.0
0
0.0
0
0.0
0
205
Function Parameter Table
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
Running time of simple AC-28 PLC reference 5
AC-29
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 5
Running time of simple AC-30 PLC reference 6
AC-31
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 6
AC-32
Running time of simple PLC reference 7
AC-33
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 7
AC-34
Running time of simple PLC reference 8
AC-35
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 8
Running time of simple AC-36 PLC reference 9
AC-37
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 9
Running time of simple AC-38 PLC reference 10
AC-39
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 10
Setting Range time 1 to 4 respectively
0.0~6500.0
0 to 3 (Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
0.0~6500.0
0 to 3 (Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
0.0~6500.0
0 to 3 (Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
0.0~6500.0
0 to 3 (Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
0.0~6500.0
0 to 3 (Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
0.0~6500.0
0 to 3 (Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
Default Property
0.0
0
0.0
0
0.0
0
0.0
0
0.0
0
0.0
0
206
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
AC-40
Running time of simple PLC reference 11
0.0~6500.0
AC-41
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 11
0 to 3
(Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
Running time of simple AC-42 PLC reference 12
0.0~6500.0
AC-43
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 12
0 to 3
(Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
AC-44
Running time of simple PLC reference 13
0.0~6500.0
AC-45
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 13
0 to 3
(Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
AC-46
Running time of simple PLC reference 14
0.0~6500.0
AC-47
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 14
0 to 3
(Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
Running time of simple AC-48 PLC reference 15
0.0~6500.0
AC-49
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC reference 15
0 to 3
(Means acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 respectively
0:s AC-50 Time unit of simple PLC
1:h
AC-51
Multi-Reference priority selection
0: No 1:Yes
AC-52
Acceleration/deceleration 0: Acceleration/deceleration time 1 time of multi-Reference 1: Acceleration/deceleration time 2
Default Property
0.0
0
0.0
0
0.0
0
0.0
0
0.0
0
0
1
0
207
Function Parameter Table
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
AC-53
AC - 00 - AC - 15 units selection of multi-segment speed
AC-55 Reference 0 source
Setting Range
2: Acceleration/deceleration time 3 3: Acceleration/deceleration time 4
0:% 1:Hz
0: Keypad 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: Pulse setting 4: PID 5: Set by preset frequency (A0-11, modified via terminal UP/ DOWN
Group Ad : Torque Control
Torque setting source in Ad-00
torque control
0: Keypad 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: Pulse setting 4: Communication setting 5: MAX(|AI1|,|AI2|)
Torque setting source in Ad-00 torque control
6: MIN(|AI1|,|AI2|)
(Full range of 1 to 6 corresponds to Ad-01)
Ad-01 Torque digital setting
-200.0% to 200.0%
Forward maximum Ad-03 frequency in torque
0.00Hz to maximum frequency(A0-14)
Reverse maximum Ad-04 frequency in torque
0.00Hz to maximum frequency(A0-14)
Ad-06 Torque setting filter time 0.00s to 10.00s
Ad-07
Acceleration time in torque control
0.0s to 1000.0s
Default Property
0
0
0
0
150.0% 50.00Hz
50.00Hz
0.00s
10.0s
208
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Ad-08 Deceleration time in torque 0.0s to 1000.0s control
Ad-10 Speed/Torque control
0: Speed control 1: Torque control
Group AE: AI Curve Setting
AE-00 AI curve 1 minimum input -10.00V to AE-02
Corresponding setting of
AE-01
-100.0% to 100.0%
AI curve 1 minimum input
AE-02 AI curve 1 inflexion 1 input AE-00 to AE-04
Corresponding setting of AE-03 AI curve 1 inflexion 1 input -100.0% to 100.0%
AE-04 AI curve 1 inflexion 2 input AE-02to AE-06
AE-05
Corresponding setting of AI curve 1 inflexion 2 input
-100.0% to 100.0%
AE-06 AI curve 1 maximum input AE-06 to 10.00V
Corresponding setting of
AE-07
-100.0% to 100.0%
AI curve 1 maximum input
AE-08 AI curve 2 minimum input -10.00V to AE-02
Corresponding setting of AE-09 AI curve 2 minimum input -100.0% to 100.0%
AE-10 AI curve 2 inflexion 1 input AE-00 to AE-04
AE-11
Corresponding setting of AI curve 2 inflexion 1 input
-100.0% to 100.0%
AE-12 AI curve 2 inflexion 2 input AE-02to AE-06
Corresponding setting of
AE-13
-100.0% to 100.0%
AI curve 2 inflexion 2 input
AE-14 AI curve 2 maximum input AE-06 to 10.00V
Corresponding setting of AE-15 AI curve 2 maximum input -100.0% to 100.0%
209
Function Parameter Table
Default Property
10.0s
0
0.00
0.0%
3.00
30.0%
6.00
60.0%
10.00
100.0%
0.00V
0.0%
3.00
30.0%
6.00
60.0%
10.00V
100.0%
Function Parameter Table
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
AE-24 Jump point of AI1 input corresponding setting
-100.0% to 100.0%
AE-25
Jump amplitude of AI1 input corresponding setting
0.0% to 100.0%
AE-26
Jump point of AI2 input corresponding setting
-100.0% to 100.0%
Jump amplitude of AI2
AE-27
0.0% to 100.0% input corresponding setting
Group AF: Factory Parameters
AF-00 User code
0 to 65535
Group C0: Motor 2 Parameters Setting
C0-00 Motor selection
1: Motor 1 2: Motor 2
Default Property
0.0%
0.5%
0.0%
0.5%
*****
1
1: Open loop flux vector control
(Speed-sensorless vector
C0-01 Motor 2 control mode
control)
2
2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F)
control
C0-02
Motor 2 acceleration/deceleration time
0: Same as motor 1 1: Acceleration/deceleration time 1 2: Acceleration/deceleration time 2 3: Acceleration/deceleration time 3 4: Acceleration/deceleration time 4
0
Group C1: Motor 2 Parameters
C1-00 Auto-tuning selection
0: No auto-tuning 1: Static auto-tuning 2: Complete auto-tuning
0
C1-01 Rated motor 2 power
0.4kW to 1000.0kW
Model
dependent
C1-02 Rated motor 3 voltage
0V to 1500V 210
380V
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Default Property
C1-03
Number of pole pairs of motor 2
2 to 64
Model dependent
C1-04 Rated motor 2 current
0.01A to 600.00 A (motor rated
power 30 kW)
C1-01
0.1A to 6000.0 A (motor rated dependent
power >30kW)
C1-05 Rated motor 2 frequency 0.00Hz to A0-14
50.00Hz
C1-06
Rated motor 2 rotational speed
0rpm to 30000rpm
C1-01
dependent
C1-07 Motor 2 no-load current
0.01A to C1-04 A (motor rated
power 30 kW)
C1-01
0.1A to C1-04 A (motor rated dependent
power >30kW)
C1-08 Motor 2 stator resistance 0.001to 65.535
Model
dependent
C1-09 Motor 2 rotor resistance 0.001to 65.535
Model
dependent
C1-10 Motor 2 mutual inductive 0.1mH to 6553.5mH
Model
dependent
C1-11 Motor 2 leakage inductive 0.01mH to 655.35mH
Model
dependent
C1-12 C1-13
Acceleration time of complete auto-tuning
Deceleration time of complete auto-tuning
1.0s to 600.0s 1.0s to 600.0s
10.0s
10.0s
C2-00
Group C2: Motor 2 V/F Control Parameters
Torque boost
0.0%30.0%
0.0%
C2-02
Oscillation suppression gain
0 to 100
Model
dependent
Group C3: Motor 2 Vector Control Parameters
211
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
C3-00 Switchover frequency 1
C3-02 Switchover frequency 2
Speed loop proportional C3-04
gain at low frequency
C3-05 Speed loop integral time at low frequency
Speed loop proportional C3-06
gain at high frequency
C3-07 Speed loop integral time at high frequency
C3-08 Speed loop integral property
C3-11
Torque adjustment proportional gain Kp
C3-12
Torque adjustment integral gain Ki
C3-13
Excitation adjustment proportional gain Kp
C3-14
Excitation adjustment integral gain Ki
C3-15 Flux braking gain
Setting Range 1.00Hz to C3-02 C3-00 to A0-14 1.0 to 10.0 0.01s to 10.00s 1.0 to 10.0
0.01s to 10.00s 0integral effect 1integral separation 0 to 30000
0 to 30000 0 to 30000
0 to 30000 100 to 200
C3-16
Field weakening torque correction ratio
C3-17 Slip compensation gain
50% to 200% 50% to 200%
C3-18
Speed loop feedback filter 0.000s to 1.000s time
212
OD9L User Manual
Default Property
5.00Hz 10.00Hz
4.0
0.50s
2.0
1.00s
0
2000
1300
2000
1300
0
100%
100%
0.015s
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Speed loop output filter C3-19 time
Setting Range 0.000s to 1.000s
C3-20 C3-21 C3-22 C3-23 E0-00 E0-01
Source of power-driven torque upper limit
0: A4-21 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: Communication setting 4: Pulse setting (DI5) (Analog range corresponds to C3-21)
Power-driven torque upper limit
0.0% to 200.0%
Source of braking torque upper limit
0: A4-23 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: Communication setting 4: Pulse setting (DI5) (Analog range corresponds to C3-23)
Braking torque upper limit
0.0% to 200.0%
Group E0: System Parameters
Parameters only for reading
0: Disable 1: Enable
LCD top menu display
0: output current 1: motor rotation speed 2:load speed 3: output voltage 4:PID giving 5: PID feedback
Default Property 0.000s
0
150.0%
0
150.0%
1
0
213
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
E0-02 LCD language selection
0: Chinese 1: English
Group E1: User - defined Parameters
Clear user-defined E1-00 parameters
0: Disable 1: Enable
E1-01 User-defined parameters 1 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-02 User-defined parameters 2 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-03 User-defined parameters 3 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-04 User-defined parameters 4 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-05 User-defined parameters 5 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-06 User-defined parameters 6 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-07 User-defined parameters 7 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-08 User-defined parameters 8 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-09 User-defined parameters 9 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-10 User-defined parameters 10 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-11 User-defined parameters 11 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-12 User-defined parameters 12 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-13 User-defined parameters 13 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-14 User-defined parameters 14 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-15 User-defined parameters 15 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-16 User-defined parameters 16 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-17 User-defined parameters 17 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-18 User-defined parameters 18 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-19 User-defined parameters 19 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
214
OD9L User Manual
Default Property
0
0
uA0-03 uA0-04 uA0-06 uA0-23 uA0-24 uA1-00 uA1-01 uA1-02 uA1-04 uA1-05 uA1-06 uA1-12 uA1-13 uA5-00 uA5-01 uA5-02 uA6-00 uA6-01 uA0-00
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
E1-20 User-defined parameters 20 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-21 User-defined parameters 21 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-22 User-defined parameters 22 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-23 User-defined parameters 23 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-24 User-defined parameters 24 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-25 User-defined parameters 25 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-26 User-defined parameters 26 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-27 User-defined parameters 27 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-28 User-defined parameters 28 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-29 User-defined parameters 29 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-30 User-defined parameters 30 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
E1-31 User-defined parameters 31 uA0-00 to uU1-xx
Group E2: Optimization Parameters
E2-00
Dead zone compensation selection
0: No compensation 1: Compensation
E2-01 PWM modulation mode
0: Asynchronous modulation 1: Synchronous modulation
PWM seven phase/five E2-02
phase selection
0: Seven phase in whole course
1: Seven phase/five phase auto switchover
E2-03 CBC current limit
0: Disable
1: Enable
E2-04 Braking threshold
350.0V to 780.0V
E2-05 Under voltage threshold
200.0V to 500.0V
Default Property
uA0-00 uA0-00 uA0-00 uA0-00 uA0-00 uA0-00 uA0-00 uA0-00 uA0-00 uA0-00 uA0-00 uA0-00
1
0
0
1
360.0V
690.0V
200.0V
350.0V
215
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
E2-06 Random PWM depth
0 to 6
E2-07 0Hz running way
0: No current output 1: Normal operation 2: Output with DC braking current A2-16
E2-08 Limitation of low frequency carrier
0: Limitation mode 0
1: Limitation mode 1
2: Unlimited (the carrier waves are in accordance in every frequency ranges)
Group E3: AI/AO Correction
E3-00 AI1 displayed voltage 1 -9.999V to 10.000V
E3-01 AI1 measured voltage 1 -9.999V to 10.000V
E3-02 AI1 displayed voltage 2 -9.999V to 10.000V
E3-03 AI1 measured voltage 2 -9.999V to 10.000V
E3-04 AI2 displayed voltage 1 -9.999V to 10.000V
E3-05 AI2 measured voltage 1 -9.999V to 10.000V
E3-06 AI2 displayed voltage 2 -9.999V to 10.000V
E3-07 AI2 measured voltage 2 -9.999V to 10.000V
E3-12 AO1 target voltage 1
-9.999V to 10.000V
E3-13 AO1 measured voltage 1 -9.999V to 10.000V
E3-14 AO1 target voltage 2
-9.999V to 10.000V
E3-15 AO1 target voltage 2
-9.999V to 10.000V
E3-16 AO2 measured voltage 1 -9.999V to 10.000V
E3-17 AO2 target voltage 1
-9.999V to 10.000V
E3-18
AO2 measured voltage 2
-9.999V to 10.000V 216
OD9L User Manual
Default Property
0
0
0
3.000V 3.000V 8.000V 8.000V 3.000V 3.000V 8.000V 8.000V 3.000V 3.000V 8.000V 8.000V 3.000V 3.000V 8.000V
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
E3-19 AO2 target voltage 2
-9.999V to 10.000V
Group E4: Master-slave Control Parameters
E4-00
Master-slave control selection
0: Disable 1: Enable
E4-01 Master-slave selection
0: Master 1: Slave
E4-02
Master sending frequency 0: Running frequency
selection
1: Target frequency
E4-03
Command source selection of slave followed the master
0: Non-follow 1: Follow
Slave received frequency
E4-04 coefficient
-10.00 to 10.00
E4-05
Slave received torque coefficient
-10.00 to 10.00
E4-06 Slave received torque offset
-50.00% to 50.00%
Frequency offset E4-07 threshold
0.20% to 10.00%
E4-08
Master-slave communication offline detection time
0.00s to 10.00s
Group E5: Braking Function Parameters
E5-00
Braking control selection
0: Disable 1: Enable
E5-01 Braking loosen frequency 0.00Hz to 20.00Hz
Braking loosen frequency
E5-02 holding time
0.0s to 20.0s
Default Property 8.000V
0
0
0
0
1.00
1.00
0.00%
0.50%
0.10S
0
2.50Hz
1.0s
217
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Braking period current
E5-03 threshold
50.0% to 200.0%
Braking actuation E5-04 frequency
0.00Hz to 20.00Hz
E5-05
Braking actuation delay time
0.0s to 20.0s
E5-06 Braking actuation frequency holding time
0.0s to 20.0s
Group E6: Sleep Wake-up Function Parameters
E6-00 Sleep selection
0:Sleep function ineffective 1:DI terminal control 2:PID setting and feedback control 3: Running frequency control
E6-01 Sleep frequency
0.00Hz to 50.00Hz
E6-02 Sleep delay time
0.0s to 3600.0s
E6-03 Wake-up deviation
0.0% to 100.0%
E6-04 Wake-up delay time
0.0s to 3600.0s
OD9L User Manual
Default Property 120.0%
1.50Hz
0.0s
1.0s
0
0.00Hz
60.0s
10.0%
0.5s
Function Code
U0-00 U0-01
Parameter Name
Group U0: Error Recording Parameters
3rd (latest) fault type 2rd (latest) fault type
00:No fault Err01: Inverter unit protection Err04: Overcurrent during acceleration Err05: Overcurrent during
Min. Unit Property
1
1
218
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
U0-02
Parameter Name
Min. Unit Property
deceleration
Err06: Over current at constant speed
Err08: Overvoltage during acceleration
Err09: Overvoltage during deceleration
Err10: Overvoltage at constant speed
Err12: Under voltage
Err13: Drive overload
Err14: Motor overload
Err15: Drive overheat
Err17: Current detection fault
Err20: Short circuit to ground
Err23: Power input phase loss
1nd fault type
Err24: Power output phase loss
1
Err25: EEPROM read-write fault
Err27: Communication fault
Err28: External equipment fault
Err29: Too large speed deviation
Err30: User-definedfault1
Err31: User-definedfault2
Err32: PID feedback lost
during running
Err33: Fast current limit fault
Err34: Load becoming 0
Err35: Control power supply fault
Err37: Control power supply fault
Err39: Current running time reached
Err40: Accumulative running time reached
219
Function Parameter Table
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
Min. Unit Property
Err42: Motor switchover fault during running
Err46: Master slave control communication disconnection
U0-03
Frequency upon the 3rd fault
0.01Hz
U0-04
Current upon the 3rd fault
0.01A
U0-05
Bus voltage upon the 3rd fault
0.1V
U0-06
DI status upon the 3rd fault
1
U0-07
Output terminal status upon the 3rd fault
1
U0-08
AC drive status upon the 3rd fault
1
U0-09
Power-on time upon the 3rd fault
1min
U0-10
Running time upon the 3rd fault
1min
U0-13
Frequency upon the 2nd fault
0.01Hz
U0-14
Current upon the 2nd fault
0.01A
U0-15
Bus voltage upon the 2nd fault
0.1V
U0-16
DI status upon the 2nd fault
1
U0-17
Output terminal status upon the 2nd fault
1
U0-18
AC drive status upon the 2nd fault
1
U0-19
Power-on time upon the 2nd fault
1min
U0-20
Running time upon the 2nd fault
1min
U0-21
Reserved
U0-22
Reserved
U0-23
Frequency upon the 1st fault
0.01Hz
U0-24
Current upon the 1st fault
0.01A
U0-25
Bus voltage upon the 1st fault
0.1V
220
OD9L User Manual
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
Min. Unit Property
U0-26
DI status upon the 1st fault
1
U0-27
Output terminal status upon the 1st fault
1
U0-28
AC drive status upon the 1st fault
1
U0-29
Power-on time upon the 1st fault
1min
U0-30
Running time upon the 1st fault
1min
Group U1: Application Monitoring Parameters
U1-00
Running frequency
0.01Hz
U1-01
Setting frequency
0.01Hz
U1-02
Bus voltage
0.1V
U1-03
Output voltage
1v
U1-04
Output current
0.1A
U1-05
Output power
0.1kW
U1-06
DI input status, hexadecimal
1
U1-07
DO output status, hexadecimal
1
U1-08
AI1 voltage after correction
0.01V
U1-09
AI2 voltage after correction
0.01V
U1-10
PID setting, PID setting ( percentage)×AA-05
1
U1-11
PID feedback, PID feedback ( percentage)×AA-05
1
U1-12
Count value
1
U1-13
Length value
1
U1-14
Motor speed
1rpm
U1-15
PLC stage
1
U1-16
Input pulse frequency
0.01kHz
221
Function Parameter Table
Function Code
Parameter Name
U1-17
Feedback speed
U1-18
Remaining running time of A7-38 setting
U1-19
AI1 voltage before correction
U1-20
AI2 voltage before correction
U1-21
HDI5 high speed pulse sampling linear speed
U1-22
Load speed display
U1-23
Current power-on time
U1-24
Current running time
U1-25
Pulse input frequency
U1-26
Communication setting value
U1-27
Main frequency X
U1-28
Auxiliary frequency Y
U1-29
Target torque
U1-30
Output torque
U1-31
Output torque
U1-32
Torque upper limit
U1-33
Target voltage upon V/F separation
U1-34
Output voltage upon V/F separation
U1-35
Reserved
U1-36
Current motor number
U1-37
AO1 target voltage
U1-38
AO2 target voltage
222
OD9L User Manual
Min. Unit Property
0.1Hz
0.1min
0.001v
0.001v
1m/min
1rpm
1min
0.1min
1Hz
0.01%
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
1V
1V
1
0.01V
0.01V
OD9L User Manual
Function Code
Parameter Name
U1-39
AC drive running status: 0:Stop 1: Forward 2: Reverse 3: Fault
U1-40
AC drive current fault
U1-41
Agent remaining limited time
U1-42
AC input current
U1-43 U1-47 U1-48
PLC current stage remaining time Accumulative running time 1 (Accumulative running time=U1-47+U1-48) Accumulative running time 2 (Accumulative running time=U1-47+U1-48)
Function Parameter Table Min. Unit Property
1
1
1h
0.1A
0.1
1h
1min
223
Function Parameter Table
OD9L User Manual
Appendix C Version Change Record
Date 2020-12
New Version V1.0
Changed Contents The initial version of user manual.
224